WO2020228648A1 - 摄像模组及电子设备 - Google Patents
摄像模组及电子设备 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2020228648A1 WO2020228648A1 PCT/CN2020/089477 CN2020089477W WO2020228648A1 WO 2020228648 A1 WO2020228648 A1 WO 2020228648A1 CN 2020089477 W CN2020089477 W CN 2020089477W WO 2020228648 A1 WO2020228648 A1 WO 2020228648A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- lens
- camera module
- reflector
- lenses
- light
- Prior art date
Links
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 claims description 47
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 40
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims description 14
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 160
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 79
- 229910001285 shape-memory alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 38
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 33
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 description 22
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 20
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 18
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 18
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 17
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 16
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 13
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 12
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 description 12
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 12
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000003638 chemical reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000005672 electromagnetic field Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 229920001621 AMOLED Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000002520 smart material Substances 0.000 description 3
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007599 discharging Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001746 injection moulding Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001788 irregular Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000696 magnetic material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000002122 magnetic nanoparticle Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000002096 quantum dot Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000001846 repelling effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000284 resting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000032683 aging Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013016 damping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000428 dust Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007257 malfunction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010079 rubber tapping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004984 smart glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/50—Constructional details
- H04N23/55—Optical parts specially adapted for electronic image sensors; Mounting thereof
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/57—Mechanical or electrical details of cameras or camera modules specially adapted for being embedded in other devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
- H04M1/02—Constructional features of telephone sets
- H04M1/0202—Portable telephone sets, e.g. cordless phones, mobile phones or bar type handsets
- H04M1/026—Details of the structure or mounting of specific components
- H04M1/0264—Details of the structure or mounting of specific components for a camera module assembly
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B13/00—Optical objectives specially designed for the purposes specified below
- G02B13/001—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras
- G02B13/0055—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras employing a special optical element
- G02B13/0065—Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras employing a special optical element having a beam-folding prism or mirror
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/64—Imaging systems using optical elements for stabilisation of the lateral and angular position of the image
- G02B27/646—Imaging systems using optical elements for stabilisation of the lateral and angular position of the image compensating for small deviations, e.g. due to vibration or shake
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B7/00—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
- G02B7/02—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses
- G02B7/022—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses lens and mount having complementary engagement means, e.g. screw/thread
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B7/00—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
- G02B7/18—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for prisms; for mirrors
- G02B7/1805—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for prisms; for mirrors for prisms
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/50—Constructional details
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/50—Constructional details
- H04N23/51—Housings
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/50—Constructional details
- H04N23/54—Mounting of pick-up tubes, electronic image sensors, deviation or focusing coils
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/62—Control of parameters via user interfaces
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/63—Control of cameras or camera modules by using electronic viewfinders
- H04N23/631—Graphical user interfaces [GUI] specially adapted for controlling image capture or setting capture parameters
- H04N23/632—Graphical user interfaces [GUI] specially adapted for controlling image capture or setting capture parameters for displaying or modifying preview images prior to image capturing, e.g. variety of image resolutions or capturing parameters
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/63—Control of cameras or camera modules by using electronic viewfinders
- H04N23/633—Control of cameras or camera modules by using electronic viewfinders for displaying additional information relating to control or operation of the camera
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/667—Camera operation mode switching, e.g. between still and video, sport and normal or high- and low-resolution modes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/67—Focus control based on electronic image sensor signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/68—Control of cameras or camera modules for stable pick-up of the scene, e.g. compensating for camera body vibrations
- H04N23/682—Vibration or motion blur correction
- H04N23/685—Vibration or motion blur correction performed by mechanical compensation
- H04N23/687—Vibration or motion blur correction performed by mechanical compensation by shifting the lens or sensor position
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/90—Arrangement of cameras or camera modules, e.g. multiple cameras in TV studios or sports stadiums
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B7/00—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
- G02B7/003—Alignment of optical elements
- G02B7/004—Manual alignment, e.g. micromanipulators
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B7/00—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
- G02B7/003—Alignment of optical elements
- G02B7/005—Motorised alignment
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M2250/00—Details of telephonic subscriber devices
- H04M2250/52—Details of telephonic subscriber devices including functional features of a camera
Definitions
- the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of camera technology, and in particular to a camera module and electronic equipment.
- the purpose of this application is to provide a low-cost camera module and electronic equipment.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a camera module.
- the camera module includes a lens group, an image sensor, a reflector, and a driving component.
- the lens group includes multiple lenses.
- the reflector is used to reflect light condensed by at least one lens of the plurality of lenses to the image sensor. "At least one" includes one or more cases.
- the driving component is used to drive the reflective part to move. In other words, the driving assembly can drive the reflector to move between different positions.
- the reflective member when the driving assembly drives the reflective member to move to different positions, the reflective member can reflect the light condensed by different lenses to the image sensor, so the image sensor can collect a variety of different images through the position change of the reflective member.
- Image That is, the camera module integrates multiple lenses into one module, and shares an image sensor by changing the position of the reflector, so as to have a variety of different shooting functions at the same time, compared to the traditional setting of multiple camera modules In the solution, the cost of the camera module of this embodiment is greatly reduced.
- the reflector Since the reflector is located between the lens group and the image sensor, compared to the optical path of the light from the lens group directly entering the image sensor, the light is directed from the lens group to the reflector, and then the reflector reflects the light to the image sensor. Longer, that is, the setting of the reflector increases the light path, so that the camera module can use a lens with a longer equivalent focal length to obtain a telephoto shooting function or even an ultra-telephoto shooting function.
- the relative position of the lens group and the image sensor can be flexibly designed, so the camera module can further reduce the overall volume of the camera module by designing the position of the lens in the lens group and the position of the image sensor.
- the lens in the lens group of the camera module of this embodiment is designed in a flat pattern, and the diameter of the lens does not affect the thickness of the camera module, which is beneficial to the camera module. Thinner.
- the camera module transfers the light converged by different lenses by changing the position of the reflector, it avoids the displacement of the lens in the lens group with high precision requirements.
- the lens can be fixed to the module bracket of the camera module, which is a camera module.
- the fixed parts in the group ensure the reliability of the camera module.
- the camera module since the overall volume of the camera module can be reasonably controlled, the camera module adopts a larger-diameter lens without greatly increasing the volume to obtain more light, making the camera module's shooting The quality is higher, and it is also convenient for shooting at night or in a dark environment.
- the equivalent focal lengths of multiple lenses are different.
- the camera module switches the lens through which the light collected by the image sensor passes by changing the stop position of the reflector.
- the lens has its corresponding fixed equivalent focal length to achieve zooming. Therefore, the camera module can achieve graded optical zoom , To output different image resolution and quality according to different needs of users.
- the reflective member can stay on multiple stay positions, and the multiple stay positions are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the multiple lenses.
- the driving assembly is used to drive the reflector to switch between multiple stay positions. At this time, the adjustment of the position of the reflector by the driving assembly is stepwise adjustment.
- the driving component can drive the reflective element to switch between different stay positions, different stay positions correspond to different lenses, and the reflective element can reflect the concentrated light of the corresponding lens to the image sensor, so the image sensor can By changing the position of the reflector, a variety of images are collected.
- the adjustment of the reflective member by the driving assembly may also be stepless adjustment.
- the reflector can also stay between adjacent staying positions. At this time, the light collected by the lens corresponding to one or more stay positions adjacent to the current stay position of the reflective element can be reflected by the reflective element to the image sensor.
- the shooting modes of the camera module are more diversified, which improves the user's shooting experience.
- the camera module may further include a motor assembly.
- the motor assembly is installed on the module bracket.
- the image sensor is installed in the motor assembly.
- the motor assembly is used to adjust the position of the image sensor to enable the camera module to achieve image focusing, thereby obtaining a clearer target image.
- the adjustment direction of the image sensor by the motor assembly is designed according to the optical path of the camera module.
- the incident light directions of the multiple lenses are the same, the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses are different, and the multiple lenses are arranged in a straight line.
- the driving component is used to drive the reflective element to move, and the moving direction of the reflective element is parallel to the arrangement direction of the multiple lenses.
- the multiple lenses are arranged in a straight line, which makes the appearance of the camera module more concise and also helps simplify the structure of the drive assembly, so that when the drive assembly drives the reflector to move, the reflector moves more smoothly.
- the camera module can switch the lens through which the light collected by the image sensor passes by changing the stop position of the reflector, and the lens has its corresponding fixed equivalent focal length to achieve zooming.
- the driving assembly to drive the reflective member to move.
- mechanical drive that is, driven by a motor, through nut screw drive, rack and pinion drive, or rope drive
- electromagnetic drive that is, through the attraction and repulsion between electromagnet and electromagnet or permanent magnet Movement
- manual adjustment type that is, part of the structure of the drive assembly is exposed outside the module bracket and adjusted by human hands
- manual and automatic integrated adjustment type that is, integrated automatic adjustment mode and manual adjustment mode
- intelligent material deformation adjustment type etc.
- the drive assembly includes a motor, a lead screw, and a nut.
- the nut is sleeved on the outside of the lead screw and threadedly connected to the lead screw.
- the reflective part fixes the connecting nut.
- the motor is used to drive the lead screw to rotate so as to drive the reflector to move between multiple stay positions through the nut.
- the driving assembly adopts a motor drive, a nut and a screw drive to move the reflector between multiple stops.
- the driving method of the driving assembly is stable and highly controllable, which makes the camera module more reliable. higher.
- the incident light directions of the multiple lenses are the same, and the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses are different.
- the multiple lenses are arranged in a triangular arrangement, an array arrangement or a circular arrangement.
- the driving assembly is used to drive the movement and rotation of the reflective member.
- the arrangement of multiple lenses of the camera module is more flexible and diversified, and the application range of the camera module is wider. Since the equivalent focal lengths of multiple lenses are different, the camera module can switch the lens through which the light collected by the image sensor passes by changing the stop position of the reflector, and the lens has its corresponding fixed equivalent focal length to achieve zooming.
- the driving assembly includes a first driving part, a second driving part, and a third driving part.
- the first driving part is used for driving the reflective member to move in the first direction.
- the second driving part is used for driving the light reflector to move in a second direction, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
- the third driving part is used for driving the reflector to rotate in a third direction, the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction, and the third direction is parallel to the light incident direction of the multiple lenses.
- the reflector can move between a plurality of stop positions corresponding to the plurality of lenses, and reflect the light passing through the lens To the image sensor, the camera module can zoom.
- the light incident directions of the multiple lenses are different, and the multiple lenses are arranged around the periphery of the reflective member.
- the drive assembly is used to drive the reflective part to rotate, or the drive assembly is used to drive the reflective part to rotate and move.
- the reflector can rotate (or rotate and move) to reflect the light gathered by different lenses, so the camera module can realize multi-directional shooting.
- the functions of the group are more diverse.
- the number of lenses with different light incident directions is more than two, so that the lens group has more than three light incident directions, and the camera module has more shooting angles and fewer blind angles, which is beneficial to realize panoramic shooting and 3D shooting.
- multiple lenses, image sensors, reflectors, driving components, etc. are located inside the module bracket of the camera module.
- the module bracket can completely seal the other parts of the camera module inside it from the outside.
- the lens group does not need to be moved, but zooming is achieved through the rotation of the reflective part located inside the module bracket, which greatly improves the sealing of the camera module.
- the camera module has a long service life and high reliability, and can be used in environments that require extreme conditions such as waterproof, dustproof, and high pressure.
- the equivalent focal lengths of multiple lenses with different light incident directions are different.
- the camera module can not only perform multi-directional shooting, but also realize zoom shooting, which makes the functions of the camera module more diversified.
- the equivalent focal lengths of multiple lenses with different light incident directions may also be the same.
- some of the lenses among the multiple lenses with different light incident directions, some of the lenses have the same equivalent focal length, and some of the lenses have different equivalent focal lengths.
- the plurality of lenses includes a first lens and a second lens.
- the first lens and the second lens are arranged back to back and have opposite light incident directions.
- the direction of the rotation axis of the reflector is perpendicular to the connecting direction of the first lens and the second lens.
- the camera module can collect images in two opposite directions, and the shooting direction is wide.
- one of the first lens and the second lens can capture an image located in front of the electronic device (the display screen of the electronic device emits light toward the front of the electronic device), and the other can capture
- the image behind the electronic device enables the electronic device to achieve front-facing and rear-facing shooting, with a good shooting experience and low cost.
- the lens group includes at least two groups of sub-lens groups with different light incident directions.
- Each sub-lens group includes multiple lenses with the same light incident direction and different equivalent focal lengths.
- the reflector is located between the two sub-lens groups.
- the driving assembly is used to drive the movement and rotation of the reflective member.
- the camera module can increase the change of focal length during 3D shooting, so as to obtain different angles of view while shooting , It also cooperates with the telephoto lens to capture distant objects, so that the captured images of distant objects can have more detailed 3D changes.
- multiple lenses in the same sub-lens group are arranged in a linear arrangement, a triangular arrangement, an array arrangement or a circular arrangement. At this time, the arrangement of lenses and the arrangement of internal components of the camera module are more flexible and diversified.
- the photosensitive surface of the image sensor is perpendicular to the equivalent central plane of each lens of the lens group.
- the equivalent center plane of the lens is the plane where the diameter of the equivalent optical center passing through the lens is located.
- the light converged by each lens is reflected by the reflector and enters the image sensor after being deflected by 90°.
- the light can make full use of the space in the two perpendicular directions of the camera module during the propagation process, that is, The space in the direction of the main optical axis of the lens and the vertical direction of the photosensitive surface of the image sensor optimizes the arrangement of the components in the camera module.
- the reflective member includes a reflective layer for reflecting light.
- the angle between the reflective layer and the main optical axis of the lens corresponding to the reflective element is 45°. At this time, the light passing through the lens is deflected by 90° after being reflected by the reflective layer, thereby smoothly entering the image sensor.
- the lens group includes a reference lens.
- the width of the reflective layer is the radial dimension passing through the center point of the reflective layer.
- the light-reflecting layer can have multiple widths in different radial directions.
- the minimum width A of the reflective layer satisfies:
- B is the radius of the reference lens
- C is the equivalent focal length of the reference lens
- E is the minimum distance between the equivalent central plane of the reference lens and the reflective layer.
- the reflective layer when all the widths of the reflective layer are greater than the minimum width A, the reflective layer can completely reflect the light condensed by the reference lens. That is, by limiting the minimum width of the reflective layer, after the light is condensed by the reference lens, it can all enter the reflective layer, and then be reflected to the image sensor, so that the camera module can collect enough light to have better The shooting quality.
- the reference lens is one of the lenses in the lens group, and the reference lens can be selected in multiple ways, for example:
- the reference lens may be the lens with the largest equivalent focal length in the lens group.
- the reference lens is a telephoto lens or an ultra telephoto lens in the lens group.
- the reflective layer has a large enough area to reflect all the light collected by each lens in the lens group to the image sensor, so that the camera module can collect enough light in various shooting modes to have better The shooting quality.
- the reference lens may also be a standard lens in the lens group.
- the light condensed by a lens with an equivalent focal length less than or equal to a standard lens can be reflected by the reflective layer to the image sensor, so that the camera module has a better shooting quality in the corresponding shooting mode.
- a lens with an equivalent focal length greater than that of a standard lens such as a telephoto lens
- the reflective layer can also reflect most of the light condensed by the lens to the image sensor, so that the camera module has good shooting quality in the corresponding shooting mode . Since the size of the reflective layer in this embodiment is designed according to a standard lens, the size of the reflective layer is smaller than the size of the reflective layer in the foregoing example, which is beneficial to the miniaturization of the camera module.
- the center of the reflective layer when the reflective element is in the resting position, the center of the reflective layer is located on the main optical axis of the lens corresponding to the reflective element, or the center of the reflective layer may be slightly deviated from the main optical axis of the lens corresponding to the reflective element.
- the reflective layer may deviate from the main optical axis of the lens corresponding to the reflector in a direction away from the image sensor, so as to better reflect the light condensed by the lens toward the image sensor
- the reflective member further includes a substrate.
- the light-reflecting layer is formed on the surface of the substrate facing the lens corresponding to the light-reflecting element. At this time, the reflective layer is arranged toward the lens and is inclined relative to the equivalent central plane of the lens.
- the reflective layer is formed on the side surface of the substrate facing the lens corresponding to the reflective element, the light is reflected by the reflective layer without entering the substrate, and the light loss is small, which helps to ensure the shooting quality of the camera module.
- the light reflecting member further includes a substrate.
- the base adopts light-transmitting material.
- the base includes a first side surface, a second side surface, and a third side surface.
- the first side surface faces the lens corresponding to the reflector.
- the second side surface faces the image sensor.
- the light-reflecting layer is formed on the third side surface and is used for reflecting the light entering the substrate from the first side surface to the second side surface.
- the light condensed by the lens enters the substrate from the first side surface, and after being reflected by the reflective layer, it exits the substrate from the second side surface and is directed toward the image sensor. Therefore, although the light enters the substrate, a slight loss occurs. However, the propagation path of light has increased, enabling the camera module to set a lens with a larger focal length to achieve telephoto shooting, even ultra-telephoto shooting.
- the reflective member further includes a substrate.
- the base adopts light-transmitting material.
- the reflective layer is embedded in the base.
- the reflective parts can be made by in-mold injection molding.
- the reflector increases the length of the light transmission path in the camera module, which is beneficial for the camera module to achieve telephoto shooting or ultra-telephoto shooting.
- the reflective layer is arranged inside the substrate, and the substrate protects the reflective layer to prevent the reflective layer from being worn during the manufacturing or assembly process of the reflective member, thereby ensuring the reliability of the camera module.
- the light-reflecting layer may be a film layer formed by coating a material on the surface of the substrate, or a formed film layer may be fixed on the surface of the substrate, or it may be formed by applying materials to the surface of the substrate. Formed by processing steps such as grinding.
- the photosensitive surface of the image sensor is parallel to the equivalent central surface of each lens of the lens group.
- the equivalent center plane of the lens is the plane where the diameter of the equivalent optical center passing through the lens is located.
- the camera module also includes a reflecting part, which is used to reflect the light reflected by the reflecting part to the image sensor.
- an included angle of 45° is formed between the reflective layer of the reflective member and the main optical axis of the lens, and the reflective layer of the reflective member is perpendicular to the reflective layer of the reflective member.
- the reflective layer of the reflective member is used to reflect light.
- the reflective layer of the reflector is used to reflect light.
- the light passing through the lens is sequentially reflected by the light reflecting member and the reflecting member, and then enters the image sensor after being deflected by 180°.
- this embodiment increases the number of reflective parts (including light reflectors and reflectors) to cause the light to be deflected multiple times, which not only makes the arrangement of image sensors more flexible, but also helps improve the camera module The flexibility of the device arrangement also makes the light propagation path longer.
- the camera module can set a lens with a larger focal length to achieve telephoto shooting or ultra-telephoto shooting.
- the number of reflective parts such as light reflectors or reflectors may also be two or more than three, which is not strictly limited in this application.
- the camera module further includes a fixing frame and an anti-shake component.
- the fixing frame is fixedly connected with the drive assembly.
- the anti-shake component is connected to the fixing frame and the reflective part, and is used to enable the reflective part to rotate relative to the fixing frame.
- the camera module is provided with an anti-shake component for driving the rotation of the reflective member to achieve optical anti-shake through compensation of the rotation of the reflective member, thereby avoiding the problem of the light cannot be focused due to the shaking of the hands during the shooting process , So that the image captured by the camera module is clear, and the user experience is better.
- the anti-shake component can be realized by a variety of driving methods, such as multi-point electromagnetic drive to rotate the reflective member, mechanical drive (gear drive, link transmission) to rotate the reflective member, and smart material deformation to drive the reflective member to rotate.
- driving methods such as multi-point electromagnetic drive to rotate the reflective member, mechanical drive (gear drive, link transmission) to rotate the reflective member, and smart material deformation to drive the reflective member to rotate.
- the fixing frame includes a first arm and a second arm. An included angle is formed between the first arm portion and the second arm portion.
- the reflector is a triangular prism.
- the reflective member includes a first side edge and a first surface and a second surface connecting the first side edge. The first surface faces the first arm, and the second surface faces the second arm.
- the anti-shake assembly includes a spherical hinge and two sets of magnetic attraction parts. The spherical hinge is connected between the first side edge and the fixing frame. Two sets of magnetic attraction members are respectively connected between the first surface and the first arm and between the second surface and the second arm.
- the reflective member by controlling the charging and discharging actions of the two sets of magnetic attraction members and the magnitude of the charging current, the reflective member can be controlled to rotate in three degrees of freedom, and the reflective member can respectively rotate around the width of the camera module and the camera module.
- the length direction of the camera module and the thickness direction of the camera module are rotated, and the driving component can drive the reflective part to move along the width direction of the camera module, so the reflective part of the camera module can realize the anti-shake of four degrees of freedom. The shooting quality is better.
- an embodiment of the present application also provides an electronic device.
- the electronic device includes a housing and any one of the aforementioned camera modules.
- the camera module is installed on the housing.
- Electronic equipment has functions such as shooting and video recording.
- the cost of the camera module is low, which can effectively reduce the overall cost of the electronic device.
- FIG. 1 is a side view of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 2 is a rear view of the electronic device shown in Figure 1;
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 2 in some embodiments;
- 4B is a schematic diagram of a user interface of the electronic device shown in FIG. 1 in another shooting mode
- 4C is a schematic diagram of a user interface of the electronic device shown in FIG. 1 in still another shooting mode
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a possible user interface when the electronic device shown in FIG. 1 switches the shooting mode
- FIG. 6A is a schematic structural diagram of the reflective member of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in an implementation manner
- FIG. 6B is a schematic structural diagram of the reflector of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in another implementation manner
- FIG. 6C is a schematic structural diagram of the reflector of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in another implementation manner
- FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the positional relationship between the reflective layer of the reflective member of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 and the lens corresponding to the reflective member;
- FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in an example
- Fig. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in Fig. 3 in another example.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- FIG. 17 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 2 in other embodiments;
- FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 17 at another angle;
- FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 2 in still other embodiments;
- FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module shown in FIG. 19 at another angle;
- FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the spherical hinge of the camera module shown in FIG. 19;
- FIG. 22 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 2 in still other embodiments;
- FIG. 23 is a rear view of an electronic device provided by another embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 23 in some embodiments;
- FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 24;
- FIG. 26 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 23 in other embodiments.
- FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 26;
- FIG. 28 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 23 in still other embodiments.
- FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 28;
- FIG. 30 is a rear view of an electronic device provided by still another embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 31 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 30 in some embodiments.
- FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 31;
- FIG. 33 is a front view of an electronic device provided by still another embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 34 is a front view of an electronic device provided by still another embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 35 is a side view of an electronic device provided by still another embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 35;
- Fig. 37 is a schematic structural view of the structure shown in Fig. 36 from another angle;
- FIG. 38 is a side view of an electronic device provided by still another embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 38;
- Fig. 40 is a schematic structural diagram of the structure shown in Fig. 39 from another angle;
- FIG. 41 is a front view of an electronic device provided by still another embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 42 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 41 in various embodiments;
- FIG. 43 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module of the electronic device shown in FIG. 41 in other embodiments.
- FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module shown in FIG. 43.
- an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, which has a photographing or camera function.
- the electronic device may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, a camera, a wearable device, an electronic eye, a video camera, etc.
- the above-mentioned wearable device may be a smart bracelet, smart watch, smart head display, smart glasses, etc.
- FIG. 1 is a side view of an electronic device 100 according to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 2 is a rear view of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG.
- the electronic device is a mobile phone as an example for description.
- the electronic device 100 includes a camera module 10, a housing 20, a display screen 30, a circuit board 40, a processor 50 and a memory 60.
- the display screen 30 is installed on the housing 20.
- the housing 20 may include a frame and a back cover.
- the display screen 30 and the back cover are respectively installed on opposite sides of the frame.
- the display screen 30 is used to display images.
- the camera module 10 is installed on the housing 20.
- the camera module 10 is used to collect images.
- the circuit board 40 is housed in the housing 20.
- the processor 50 and the memory 60 are fixed on the circuit board 40.
- the display screen 30, the camera module 10 and the memory 60 are coupled to the processor 50.
- the memory 60 is used to store computer program codes.
- the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the processor 50 is used for invoking computer instructions to enable the electronic device 100 to perform corresponding operations, for example, enabling the display screen 30 to display a target image, and the camera module 10 to capture the target image.
- the width direction of the camera module 10 is defined as the X direction in the figure
- the length direction of the camera module 10 is the direction Y in the figure
- the thickness direction of the camera module 10 is shown in the figure. Show the direction Z.
- the width direction X of the camera module 10 is parallel to the width direction of the electronic device 100
- the length direction Y of the camera module 10 is parallel to the length direction of the electronic device 100
- the thickness direction Z of the camera module 10 is parallel Take the thickness direction of the electronic device 100 as an example.
- the display screen 30 may be an organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display screen, an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode).
- OLED organic light-emitting diode
- AMOLED active-matrix organic light-emitting diode
- mini organic light-emitting diode display mini organic light-emitting diode display
- micro organic light-emitting diode display micro organic light-emitting diode (microorganic light-emitting diode) display
- Quantum dot light emitting diode quantum dot light emitting diode, QLED
- LCD liquid crystal display
- the front of the electronic device 100 is located on one side of the electronic device 100
- the rear of the electronic device 100 is located on the other side of the electronic device 100
- the display screen 30 emits light toward the front of the electronic device 100.
- the camera module 10 can capture images located behind the electronic device 100. For example, a camera hole is opened on the back cover of the electronic device 100, and the camera module 10 takes pictures through the camera hole.
- the camera module 10 can also capture an image in front of the electronic device 100.
- the camera module 10 takes pictures through the non-display area of the display screen 30.
- the display screen 30 may be a special-shaped screen.
- the top of the display screen 30 forms a trapezoidal or drop-shaped non-display area.
- the display screen 30 may also be a relatively regular rectangular screen. In this case, the top space or the bottom space of the display screen 30 forms a non-display area.
- a light-transmitting hole or light-transmitting part is provided in the display screen 30, and the camera module 10 is located under the display screen 30, and the camera module 10 takes pictures through the light-transmitting hole or the light-transmitting part.
- the circuit board 40 may be provided with a hollow avoidance area, and the camera module 10 may be arranged in the avoidance area.
- the overall size of the assembly structure of the camera module 10 and the circuit board 40 in the thickness direction of the electronic device 100 (that is, the thickness direction Z of the camera module 10) is small, which is beneficial to the lighter and thinner of the electronic device 100.
- the camera module 10 includes a flexible circuit board 1, and one end of the flexible circuit board 1 is provided with an electrical connector. The electrical connector of the flexible circuit board 1 is connected to the electrical connector on the circuit board 40 so that the camera module 10 is coupled with the circuits and devices on the circuit board 40.
- the electrical connector of the flexible circuit board 1 may be a board-to-board (BTB) connector.
- the electrical signal transmitted between the flexible circuit board 1 and the circuit board 40 may include a camera function signal, a driving component control signal, and the like.
- the camera module 10 and the circuits and devices on the circuit board 40 can also be coupled through a wireless connection.
- FIG. 3 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 in some embodiments.
- the plane where the diagram of FIG. 3 is located corresponds to the position of the A-A line of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2.
- the camera module 10 may include a module holder 2, a lens group 3, an image sensor 4, a reflector 5 and a driving component 6.
- the image sensor 4 may also be called a photosensitive element.
- the module bracket 2 is used to fix and protect other components of the camera module 10.
- the lens group 3, the image sensor 4, the reflector 5 and the driving assembly 6 are mounted on the module bracket 2.
- the module bracket 2 is installed in the housing of the electronic device 100.
- the lens group 3 may include multiple lenses with different equivalent focal lengths.
- Multiple means at least two, that is, two or more.
- the number of lenses in the lens group 3 may be two, three, four or more.
- FIG. 3 some embodiments of the present application will be described in detail by taking the lens group 3 including three lenses (31a, 31b, and 31c) as an example.
- multiple lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) of the lens group 3 may be arranged in the width direction X of the camera module 10.
- the multiple lenses of the lens group 3 may also be arranged in the longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10 or other directions.
- the equivalent focal length of the lens 31c on the right is larger than the equivalent focal length of the lens 31b on the middle, and the equivalent focal length of the lens 31b on the middle is larger than the equivalent focal length of the lens 31a on the left.
- the lens closer to the image sensor 4 has a smaller equivalent focal length, and the lens further away from the image sensor 4 has a larger equivalent focal length.
- the light collected by each lens can form a clearer image on the image sensor 4, so that the quality of the image captured by the camera module 10 is better.
- the three lenses of the lens group 3 may include a wide-angle lens, a standard lens, and a telephoto lens.
- the lens 31b may be a standard lens
- the lens 31c is a telephoto lens
- the lens 31a is a wide-angle lens.
- the lens group 3 may also include five lenses, and the five lenses may be an ultra-wide-angle lens, a wide-angle lens, a standard lens, a telephoto lens, and an ultra-telephoto lens.
- the number and types of lenses in the lens group 3 may also have different combinations, which are not strictly limited in this application.
- the standard lens may be the main lens of the electronic device 100.
- multiple lenses are distinguished by equivalent focal lengths.
- the equivalent focal length of the ultra-wide-angle lens may be in the range of 13 mm to 20 mm.
- the equivalent focal length of a wide-angle lens can be in the range of 24 mm to 38 mm.
- the equivalent focal length of a standard lens can be in the range of 40 mm to 55 mm.
- the equivalent focal length of a telephoto lens can be in the range of 85 mm to 300 mm.
- the equivalent focal length of an ultra-telephoto lens can be greater than 300 mm.
- the field of view of the ultra-wide-angle lens can range from 94 degrees to 118 degrees.
- the field of view of the wide-angle lens can range from 60 degrees to 84 degrees.
- the angle of view of the standard lens is about 50 degrees.
- the reflector 5 is used to reflect the light converged by one of the lenses to the image sensor 4.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move.
- the driving assembly 6 can be used to drive the reflector 5 to switch between multiple dwell positions. Multiple stay positions correspond to multiple lenses one-to-one.
- the number of stop positions is equal to the number of lenses, and each stop position corresponds to a lens.
- the reflector 5 is used to reflect the light collected by the corresponding lens to the image sensor 4.
- the corresponding lens refers to the lens corresponding to the stop position of the reflective element 5.
- the camera module 10 has three stop positions (61a, 61b, 61c), and the three stop positions (61a, 61b, 61c) and the three lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) are arranged in one-to-one correspondence.
- the reflector 5 can reflect the light collected by the lens corresponding to the stop position to the image sensor 4.
- the stop position 61b corresponds to the lens 31b
- the reflector 5 reflects the light collected by the lens 31b to the image sensor 4, and the image sensor 4 can collect the image through the lens 31b by means of the reflector 5 .
- the stop position 61a corresponds to the lens 31a.
- the reflector 5 reflects the light condensed by the lens 31a to the image sensor 4, and the image sensor 4 can collect the image passing through the lens 31a by means of the reflector 5.
- the stop position 61c corresponds to the lens 31c.
- the reflector 5 reflects the light condensed by the lens 31c to the image sensor 4, and the image sensor 4 can collect the image passing through the lens 31c by means of the reflector 5.
- the distance between the above three stay positions (61a, 61b, 61c) may be the same.
- the distance between the three lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) is also the same. In this way, the appearance consistency of the camera module 10 is better.
- the distance between the above three stay positions (61a, 61b, 61c) can also be different, so that the arrangement of the three lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) is more flexible,
- the design solutions of the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses in Group 3 can be more diverse.
- the driving assembly 6 can drive the reflective element 5 to switch between different stay positions
- the different stay positions correspond to lenses with different equivalent focal lengths
- the reflective element 5 can reflect the light collected by the corresponding lens to the image
- the image sensor 4 can collect a variety of images with different focal lengths by changing the position of the reflector 5. That is, the camera module 10 integrates multiple lenses with different equivalent focal lengths into one module. Through the change of the position of the reflector 5, the same image sensor 4 is shared to simultaneously have multiple shooting functions with different focal lengths. Compared with the traditional solution of arranging multiple camera modules, the cost of the camera module 10 of this embodiment is greatly reduced, and the space inside the electronic device is also saved.
- the camera module 10 switches the lens through which the light collected by the image sensor 4 passes by changing the stop position of the reflector 5, thereby achieving zooming. Therefore, the camera module 10 can achieve stepped optical zooming to meet different needs of users. Output different image resolution and image quality. Among them, since the camera module 10 transmits the light condensed by lenses with different equivalent focal lengths by changing the position of the reflector 5, the displacement of the lens in the lens group 3, which requires high precision, is avoided, and the lens is fixed to the module bracket 2. , Is a fixed component in the camera module 10, thereby ensuring the reliability of the camera module 10.
- the reflector 5 Since the reflector 5 is located between the lens group 3 and the image sensor 4, compared to the light path from the lens group directly into the image sensor, the light is directed from the lens group 3 to the reflector 5, and then the reflector 5 reflects the light to the image
- the length of the optical path of the sensor 4 is longer, that is, the setting of the reflector 5 increases the light path, so that the camera module 10 can use a lens with a longer equivalent focal length to obtain a telephoto shooting function or even an ultra-telephoto shooting function .
- the plurality of stop positions of the camera module 10 may include an initial stop position.
- the initial stay position may refer to the position where the reflective member 5 stays when the camera module 10 starts or stops working (for example, when the image sensor 4 is in sleep or power off). That is to say, when the camera module 10 is activated, the reflector 5 stays at the initial stop position, or switches from another stop position to the initial stop position, and the image sensor 4 collects the light collected by the lens corresponding to the initial stop position; 10 When the work stops, the reflector 5 is located at the initial stop position, or is switched from another stop position to the initial stop position and stays there.
- the above-mentioned initial stop position may be the stop position that the user uses most frequently in a period of time, so that the user can quickly take pictures in a way that he likes.
- the aforementioned initial stay position can be dynamically changed. Referring to FIG. 3, for example, in a certain period of time, the stay position 61b is the most frequently used stay position, and the stay position 61b is the initial stay position. In another time period, the stay position 61c is the most frequently used stay position, and the stay position 61c is the initial stay position.
- FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of a user interface of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 in one shooting mode
- FIG. 4B is a user interface of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 in another shooting mode
- FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram of the user interface of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 in another shooting mode. The following describes several possible shooting modes of the camera module 10 with reference to the user interface of the electronic device 100:
- FIG. 4A corresponds to the default shooting mode.
- the electronic device 100 starts the camera module 10 after receiving the user's operation of starting shooting (for example, opening a photographing application).
- the start shooting operation may be an operation triggered by a shooting icon in the user interface, an operation triggered by a preset action of a mechanical key of the electronic device 100, or an operation triggered by a preset voice of the electronic device 100.
- the reflector 5 can be located at the initial stop position (for example, the stop position 61b in FIG.
- the camera module 10 is in the normal shooting mode.
- the user interface of the electronic device 100 displays an image as shown in FIG. 4A.
- the user interface shown in FIG. 4A includes a preview frame 401, a setting bar 402 (including the setting of shooting parameters such as flash and HDR), a shooting mode bar 403, a zoom ratio indicator 404, a shooting shutter button 405, and an echo control 406 and controls 407 for switching between the front camera and the rear camera.
- the shooting shutter button 405 is used to receive a user's operation (for example, clicking, tapping, pressing, etc.), and the electronic device 100 saves the image indicated in the preview box 401 as a picture in response to the operation.
- the control 407 is used to receive the user's operation.
- the electronic device 100 switches the reflective member 5 of the camera module 10 from the current stop position to another stop position with a different light incident direction (see Figure 36 below for implementation) In the example, stay at 61d and 61f), or switch the current camera module to another camera module with a different light incident direction.
- the image sensor 4 of the camera module 10 captures the target scene image.
- the shooting operation may be an operation triggered by a shooting icon in the user interface, an operation triggered by a preset action of a mechanical button of the electronic device 100, or an operation triggered by a preset voice of the electronic device 100.
- the reflector 5 of the camera module 10 can switch from the initial stop position or other stop positions to the stop position corresponding to the zoom ratio range of the target zoom ratio to achieve zooming.
- the zoom magnification range corresponding to the stay 61a is less than 1, when the reflector 5 is at the stay 61a, the camera module 10 is in the wide-angle shooting mode; the zoom magnification range corresponding to the stay 61b is greater than or equal to 1 and less than 1.5, when the reflector 5 is in the stop position 61b, the camera module 10 is in the default shooting mode; the zoom magnification range corresponding to the stop position 61c is greater than or equal to 1.5, and when the reflector 5 is in the stop position 61c, the camera module 10 is in the Telephoto shooting mode.
- the electronic device 100 confirms that the target zoom magnification is 1, and the target zoom magnification is 1 and the zoom magnification range (greater than or equal to 1 and less than 1.5) corresponds to the stop position 61b, and the reflector 5 is located at the stop position 61b .
- FIG. 4B corresponds to the telephoto shooting mode.
- the electronic device 100 confirms that the target zoom magnification is 1.5, and the zoom magnification range of the target zoom magnification of 1.5 (greater than or equal to 1.5) corresponds to the stay position 61c, and the reflector 5 can move the stay position 61c from the initial stay position or other stay positions,
- the camera module 10 is in a telephoto shooting mode.
- the user interface of the electronic device 100 displays an image as shown in FIG. 4B.
- FIG. 4C corresponds to the wide-angle shooting mode.
- the electronic device 100 confirms that the target zoom magnification is 0.8, and the zoom magnification range of the target zoom magnification 0.8 (less than or equal to 1) corresponds to the stop position 61a, and the reflector 5 can move from the initial stop position or other stop positions to the stop position 61a ,
- the camera module 10 is in a wide-angle shooting mode.
- the user interface of the electronic device 100 displays an image as shown in FIG. 4C.
- the image in the preview frame of the electronic device 100 will have a short switching time gap.
- the image in the preview frame of the electronic device 100 may use a transition image to fill the gap.
- the transition image can be a black screen or a blurred image after the previous image is frozen.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a possible user interface when the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 switches the shooting mode.
- FIG. 5 illustrates that when the reflective member 5 switches from the initial stop position to the target stop position, the electronic device 100 uses the blurred image after the last image is frozen as the transition image.
- the transition image may have an animation effect that gradually blurs from FIG. 4C to FIG. 5, which can improve the user's shooting experience.
- the image captured by the image sensor 4 in real time may also be displayed in the preview frame of the electronic device 100.
- the image is a dynamic image, and the user can clearly perceive the zooming process of the camera module 10 through the dynamic image, thereby improving the user's shooting experience.
- the camera module 10 since the reflective member 5 of the camera module 10 is switched between the stop positions, the camera module 10 implements a stepped optical zoom, and the electronic device 100 can also use the processor to analyze the image collected by the image sensor 4 For processing, the digital zoom is combined with the stepped optical zoom of the camera module 10 to realize the stepless zoom on the image display.
- the relative position of the lens group 3 and the image sensor 4 can be flexibly designed, so the camera module 10 can further design the lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) in the lens group 3
- the position of the image sensor 4 and the position of the image sensor 4 can reduce the volume of the camera module 10, thereby reducing the volume of the electronic device 100.
- the lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) in the lens group 3 of the camera module 10 of this embodiment are tiled, and the diameters of the lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) The size also does not affect the thickness of the camera module 10 (the Z direction in FIG. 3), which is beneficial to the thinning of the camera module 10.
- the camera module 10 can adopt a lens with a larger aperture without greatly increasing the volume to obtain more lighting, so that the camera module The shooting quality of 10 is higher, and it is also convenient for shooting at night or in a dark environment.
- one lens or a combination of multiple lenses may be included in one lens.
- the multiple lenses include convex lenses, and may also include concave lenses.
- the lens 31b includes a lens 311 as an example for description.
- each lens (31a, 31b, 31c) in the lens group 3 is substantially the same, and the main difference is that the lens size or the lens material of the lenses with different equivalent focal lengths can be different.
- the diameters of the multiple lenses in the lens group 3 may be the same or different.
- the diameter of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, and 31c) in the lens group 3 is the same as an example for description.
- each lens in the lens group 3 has an equivalent central plane.
- the equivalent center plane of the lens is the plane where the diameter of the equivalent optical center passing through the lens is located.
- the equivalent center plane of the lens is perpendicular to the main optical axis of the lens.
- the equivalent optical center of the lens is the optical center of the lens.
- the equivalent optical center of the lens is the optical center of the lens group formed by the multiple lenses.
- the lens 31 b has an equivalent central plane 313, the lens 31 b has a main optical axis 314, and the equivalent central plane 313 is perpendicular to the main optical axis 314.
- the lens 31b includes a lens 311, and the equivalent optical center of the lens 31b is the optical center of the lens 311.
- “the equivalent central planes of the lenses with the same light incident direction of the lens group 3 are flush” are taken as an example for description. In some other embodiments, the equivalent central planes of lenses with the same light incident direction of the lens group 3 may also be uneven.
- the multiple lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) of the lens group 3 may each have an independent lens barrel, and the multiple lenses are respectively mounted on the module bracket 2 through the lens barrels.
- the lens 31b includes a lens barrel 312.
- multiple lenses of the lens group 3 can share a lens barrel frame, the lens or lens group of each lens is mounted on the lens frame, and the lens barrel frame is fixed to the module bracket 2.
- the camera module 10 can fix multiple lenses at the same time through the module bracket 2, which is formed by compactly arranging multiple independent camera modules (each with a module bracket) in a traditional solution.
- the overall volume of the camera module 10 in this embodiment is smaller, the installation space required is smaller, and it can be installed in the electronic device 100 more flexibly.
- the module support 2 may include a support base 21 and a lens fixing frame 22, and the lens fixing frame 22 is fixed to the support base 21.
- a plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) are mounted on the lens holder 22.
- the lens fixing frame 22 is detachably installed on the bracket base 21, so that the camera module 10 can be removed during subsequent maintenance by disassembling the lens fixing frame 22 to remove the lens group 3, which is convenient for maintenance and low cost.
- the lens fixing frame 22 may also be non-detachably mounted on the bracket base 21 to ensure the structural strength and firmness of the camera module 10.
- the camera module 10 may further include a light-transmitting protective cover 7.
- the structural strength of the protective cover 7 is relatively high.
- the protective cover 7 is installed on the module bracket 2 and covers a plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) to protect the lenses or lens groups of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- the lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) of the lens group 3 are placed close to the protective cover 7, and relatively far away from the reflector 5 to shorten the optical path between the lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) and the protective cover 7 , Increasing the optical path between the lens (31a, 31b, 31c) and the reflective member 5, so that the camera module 10 can use a lens with a longer equivalent focal length to obtain a telephoto shooting function, or even an ultra-telephoto shooting function.
- the lens group 3 is placed close to the protective cover 7, although the protective cover 7 has no field of view, the lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) of the lens group 3 have a field of view, so the camera module 10 can obtain a larger The amount of lighting, which has a higher shooting quality. It is understandable that when the distance between the lens group 3 and the protective cover 7 is far, the external light is easily blocked by the structure between the lens group 3 and the protective cover 7, resulting in insufficient lighting of the camera module 10. Therefore, when designing, the lens group 3 can be as close to the protective cover 7 as possible.
- the protective cover 7 can be made of glass material or high-transmittance plastic material.
- each lens of the lens group 3 may have an independent protective cover, and the protective cover of each lens is fixed to its lens barrel to protect its lens.
- the lens fixing frame 22 is in a sealed connection with the top of the base bracket 21, and the lens fixing frame 22 is in a sealed connection with the lens, and the lens part is exposed outside the module bracket 2.
- the camera module 10 may further include a motor assembly 8.
- the motor assembly 8 is installed on the module bracket 2.
- the image sensor 4 is mounted on the motor assembly 8.
- the motor assembly 8 is used to adjust the position of the image sensor 4 to enable the camera module 10 to achieve image focusing, thereby obtaining a clearer target image.
- the adjustment direction of the image sensor 4 by the motor assembly 8 is designed according to the optical path of the camera module 10.
- the motor assembly 8 can drive the image sensor 4 to float left and right, that is, move in the direction X.
- FIG. 6A is a schematic structural diagram of the reflective member 5 of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in an implementation manner.
- FIG. 6A shows the lens 31b and the image sensor 4 of the camera module 10 at the same time.
- the light reflecting member 5 includes a light reflecting layer 51 for reflecting light.
- the reflective member 5 may also include a substrate 52.
- the light reflecting layer 51 is formed on the surface of the substrate 52 facing the lens 31b corresponding to the light reflecting member 5. At this time, the reflective layer 51 is disposed toward the lens 31b and is inclined with respect to the equivalent central plane 313 of the lens 31b.
- the shape of the substrate 52 can be realized in various ways, such as a triangular prism, a rectangular parallelepiped, a flat plate, or an irregular shape.
- the shape of the reflective layer 51 may be a circle, a square, a triangle, or an irregular shape.
- the material of the substrate 52 may be light-transmissive or opaque.
- the base 52 is in the shape of a triangular prism as an example for description.
- the light reflecting layer 51 is formed on the side surface of the substrate 52.
- the light reflecting layer 51 has a square shape.
- the reflective layer 51 can be a film layer formed by coating a material on the surface of the substrate 52, or a formed film layer can be fixed on the surface of the substrate 52, or it can be formed by coating the surface of the substrate 52. Formed by processing steps such as grinding.
- the embodiment of the present application does not strictly limit the structure and the forming method of the reflective layer 51.
- the reflective layer 51 is formed on the side surface of the substrate 52 facing the lens 31b corresponding to the reflector 5, the light does not need to enter the substrate 52 to be reflected by the reflective layer 51, and the light loss is small, which is beneficial to ensure the imaging mode The shooting quality of group 10.
- FIG. 6B is a schematic structural diagram of the reflective member 5 of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in another implementation manner.
- FIG. 6B shows the lens 31b of the camera module 10 and the image sensor 4 at the same time.
- FIG. 6B does not show the refraction of light when it enters and exits the surface of the reflective member 5. The following mainly describes the difference between this implementation manner and the foregoing implementation manner, and most of the technical content of this implementation manner that is the same as the foregoing implementation manner will not be repeated hereafter.
- the light reflecting member 5 may include a light reflecting layer 51 for reflecting light.
- the reflective member 5 may also include a substrate 52.
- the base 52 is made of a light-transmitting material.
- the base 52 includes a first side surface 521, a second side surface 522 and a third side surface 523.
- the first side surface 521 faces the lens 31b corresponding to the reflector 5.
- the second side surface 522 faces the image sensor 4.
- the light-reflecting layer 51 is formed on the third side surface 523 and is used for reflecting the light entering the substrate 52 from the first side surface 521 to the second side surface 522.
- the base 52 is a triangular prism.
- Two sides of the first side surface 521 are respectively connected to the second side surface 522 and the third side surface 523, the side of the second side surface 522 away from the first side surface 521 and the side of the third side surface 523 away from the first side surface 521
- the sides are connected to each other.
- the light condensed by the lens 31b enters the substrate 52 from the first side surface 521, and after being reflected by the reflective layer 51, it exits the substrate 52 from the second side surface 522 and then is directed toward the image sensor 4.
- a slight loss occurs after entering the substrate 52, but the propagation path of the light increases, so that the camera module 10 can be equipped with a lens with a larger focal length, so as to achieve telephoto shooting or even ultra-telephoto shooting.
- FIG. 6C is a schematic structural diagram of the reflector 5 of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in another implementation manner.
- FIG. 6C shows the lens 31b of the camera module 10 and the image sensor 4 at the same time.
- FIG. 6C does not show the refraction that occurs when light enters and exits the surface of the reflective member 5. The following mainly describes the difference between this implementation manner and the foregoing implementation manner, and most of the technical content of this implementation manner that is the same as the foregoing implementation manner will not be repeated hereafter.
- the light reflecting member 5 may include a light reflecting layer 51 for reflecting light.
- the reflective member 5 may also include a substrate 52.
- the substrate 52 can be made of a light-transmitting material.
- the reflective layer 51 is embedded inside the substrate 52.
- the reflector 5 can be made by in-mold injection molding.
- the reflector 5 increases the length of the light transmission path in the camera module 10, which is beneficial for the camera module 10 to achieve telephoto shooting or ultra-telephoto shooting.
- the reflective layer 51 is disposed inside the substrate 52, and the substrate 52 protects the reflective layer 51 to prevent the reflective layer 51 from being worn during the manufacturing or assembly process of the reflective member 5, thereby ensuring the reliability of the camera module 10.
- the structure of the reflective member 5 and the positional relationship between the reflective member 5 and the lenses of the lens group 3 can also be implemented in other ways, which are not strictly limited in this application.
- the position and size of the reflective layer 51 are reasonably designed, so that the reflective member 5 can reflect enough light to the image sensor 4 to ensure the shooting quality of the camera module 10.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the positional relationship between the reflective layer 51 of the reflective member 5 of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 and the lens 31b corresponding to the reflective member 5.
- the angle between the reflective layer 51 and the main optical axis 314 of the lens 31b corresponding to the reflective element 5 is 45°.
- the light passing through the lens 31b is deflected by 90° after being reflected by the reflective layer 51, and thus enters the image sensor 4 smoothly.
- the center of the reflective layer 51 is located on the main optical axis 314 of the lens 31b corresponding to the reflective member 5.
- the center of the light reflecting layer 51 may also be slightly deviated from the main optical axis 314 of the lens 31b corresponding to the light reflecting member 5.
- the reflective layer 51 may deviate from the main optical axis 314 of the lens 31b corresponding to the reflective member 5 in a direction away from the image sensor 4 to better reflect the light condensed by the lens 31b toward the image sensor 4.
- the lens group 3 may include a reference lens.
- the illustrated reference lens is the lens 31b corresponding to the reflector 5 at present.
- the width A'of the light reflecting layer 51 is the radial dimension passing through the center point of the light reflecting layer 51.
- the light-reflecting layer 51 may have multiple widths A'in different radial directions.
- the minimum width A of the reflective layer 51 satisfies:
- B is the radius of the reference lens
- C is the equivalent focal length of the reference lens
- E is the minimum distance between the equivalent central plane of the reference lens and the reflective layer 51.
- B is the radius of the lens 31 b
- C is the equivalent focal length of the lens 31 b
- E is the minimum distance between the equivalent central plane 313 of the lens 31 b and the reflective layer 51.
- the reflective layer 51 when all the widths A'of the reflective layer 51 are greater than or equal to the minimum width A, the reflective layer 51 can completely reflect the light condensed by the reference lens. That is, by limiting the minimum width of the reflective layer 51, after the light is converged by the reference lens, it can all enter the reflective layer 51 and be reflected toward the image sensor 4, so that the camera module 10 can collect enough light, thereby Have better shooting quality.
- the widths A'of the reflective layer 51 are greater than or equal to the minimum width A, and therefore the width at the narrowest position of the reflective layer 51 is also greater than or equal to the minimum width A.
- the light-reflecting layer 51 is rectangular, and the short-side dimension of the light-reflecting layer 51 is smaller than the long-side dimension, the short-side dimension of the light-reflecting layer 51 is greater than or equal to the minimum width A.
- the reflective layer 51 is circular, the diameter of the reflective layer 51 is greater than or equal to the minimum width A.
- the reference lens may be one of the lenses in the lens group 3.
- the reference lens may be selected in various ways, for example:
- the reference lens may be the lens with the largest equivalent focal length in the lens group 3.
- the reference lens may be a telephoto lens or an ultra telephoto lens in the lens group 3.
- the reflective layer 51 has a large enough area to reflect all the light converged by each lens in the lens group 3 to the image sensor 4, so that the camera module 10 can collect enough light in various shooting modes. Light to have better shooting quality.
- the reference lens may be a standard lens in lens group 3.
- all the light condensed by a lens with an equivalent focal length less than or equal to a standard lens can be reflected by the reflective layer 51 to the image sensor 4, so that the camera module 10 has better shooting quality in the corresponding shooting mode.
- the reflective layer 51 can also reflect most of the light condensed by the lens to the image sensor 4, so that the camera module 10 has a good performance in the corresponding shooting mode. The shooting quality. Since the size of the reflective layer 51 in this embodiment is designed according to a standard lens, the size of the reflective layer 51 is smaller than that of the reflective layer 51 in the foregoing example, which is beneficial to the miniaturization of the camera module 10.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move, so that the reflective member 5 is switched between the stop positions, and the plurality of stop positions are set in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of lenses of the lens group 3, so the driving assembly
- the setting of 6 is designed according to the arrangement of multiple lenses.
- FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of multiple lenses of the lens group 3: the multiple lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) have the same light incident direction, and more The lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) are arranged in a straight line.
- the incoming light direction of the lens is the direction in which external light enters the lens.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move.
- the moving direction of the reflective member 5 is consistent with the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- the multiple lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) are arranged in a straight line, which makes the appearance of the camera module 10 and the electronic device 100 more concise, and also helps to simplify the structure of the drive assembly 6 so that the drive When the component 6 drives the reflective member 5 to move, the reflective member 5 moves more smoothly, so as to improve the reliability of the camera module 10.
- the driving assembly 6 can drive the reflective member 5 to move in many ways.
- mechanical drive that is, driven by a motor, through nut screw drive, rack and pinion drive, or rope drive
- electromagnetic drive that is, through the attraction and repulsion between electromagnet and electromagnet or permanent magnet Movement
- manual adjustment type that is, part of the structure in the drive assembly 6 is exposed outside the module bracket and adjusted by human hands
- manual automatic adjustment type that is, integrated automatic adjustment mode and manual adjustment mode
- intelligent material deformation adjustment type etc.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in an example.
- the driving mode of the driving assembly 6 is a mechanical driving mode.
- the driving assembly 6 may include a motor 621, a lead screw 622, and a nut 623.
- the extending direction of the screw 622 is parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- multiple lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) may be arranged in the width direction X of the camera module 10.
- the nut 623 is sleeved on the outside of the screw 622 and is threadedly connected to the screw 622.
- the reflective member 5 fixes the connecting nut 623.
- the two components are fixedly connected, which means that after the two components are connected, they remain fixed to each other.
- the motor 621 is used to drive the screw 622 to rotate, so as to drive the reflector 5 to move between the multiple stay positions (61a, 61b, 61c) through the nut 623.
- the motor 621 is coupled to the processor of the electronic device 100, and the motor 621 performs corresponding operations according to the signal sent by the processor, such as forward rotation, reverse rotation, and stop rotation.
- the driving assembly 6 is driven by a motor 621, a nut 623 and a screw 622 are used to move the reflector 5 between the stop positions (61a, 61b, 61c), and the driving mode of the driving assembly 6 is stable and controllable
- the high performance makes the camera module 10 more reliable.
- the motor 621 may be a stepper motor.
- the control method of the motor 621 may be a closed-loop control, which can improve the control accuracy of the moving position of the reflective member 5, making the driving action of the driving assembly 6 more reliable and accurate, and ensuring the shooting quality of the camera module 10.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a speed reducer 624.
- the reducer 624 is connected between the motor 621 and the lead screw 622.
- the reducer 624 can reduce the output speed of the motor 621 and increase the output torque.
- the speed reducer 624 may be a gear box.
- the motor 621 may be fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the drive assembly 6 may also include a bearing 625.
- the bearing 625 is fixedly connected to the module support 2 and is spaced apart from the motor 621.
- the end of the screw 622 away from the motor 621 is mounted on the bearing 625.
- the bearing 625 can reduce the frictional force when the screw 622 rotates, so that the rotation of the screw 622 is smoother, so as to reduce the probability of malfunction of the camera module 10.
- the lead screw 622 may have a right-handed external thread.
- the motor 621 drives the screw 622 to rotate to the right
- the nut 623 drives the reflector 5 to move to the right, so that the camera module 10 can zoom.
- the motor 621 drives the screw 622 to rotate to the left
- the nut 623 drives the reflector 5 to move to the left, so that the camera module 10 can zoom.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a transmission member 626.
- a nut 623 is connected to one end of the transmission member 626.
- the other end of the transmission member 626 is connected to the reflective member 5. That is, the transmission member 626 is connected between the reflective member 5 and the nut 623.
- the transmission member 626 and the nut 623 may be integrally formed.
- the transmission member 626 and the nut 623 may also be assembled to form an integrated structure. It can be understood that, in other implementations, the drive assembly 6 may not include the transmission member 626, but by designing the structure of the reflective member 5, the reflective member 5 has a transmission portion (equivalent to the aforementioned transmission member 626). The driving assembly 6 can make the reflective member 5 move between the stop positions by controlling the transmission part.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a guide rod 627.
- the guide rod 627 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the extending direction of the guide rod 627 is parallel to the extending direction of the screw 622.
- the transmission member 626 is provided with a guide hole.
- the guide rod 627 passes through the guide hole.
- the guide rod 627 is used to guide the moving direction of the transmission member 626, so that the transmission member 626 can move the reflective member 5 more smoothly.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 627 and the transmission member 626 can also be achieved by providing a T-shaped block in one of the guide rod 627 and the transmission member 626, and a T-shaped groove in the other. Work together to achieve.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 627 and the transmission member 626 can also be realized by other matching structures, which is not strictly limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- the driving mode of the driving assembly 6 is a mechanical driving mode.
- the driving assembly 6 may include a motor 631, a gear set 632, and a rack 633.
- the motor 631 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the gear set 632 includes an input gear and an output gear linked with the input gear.
- the output gear meshes with the input gear.
- one or more connecting gears are connected between the output gear and the input gear.
- the motor 631 is connected to the input gear to drive the input gear to rotate.
- the output gear meshes with the rack 633.
- the extending direction of the rack 633 is parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- the reflective member 5 is fixedly connected to the rack 633.
- the motor 631 drives the input gear to rotate, the input gear drives the rack 633 to move, and the rack 633 drives the reflector 5 to move between multiple stop positions (61a, 61b, 61c), so that the camera module 10 can zoom.
- the motor 631 is coupled to the processor of the electronic device 100, and the motor 631 performs corresponding operations according to the signal sent by the processor, such as forward rotation, reverse rotation, and stop rotation.
- the motor 631 may be a stepper motor.
- the control method of the motor 631 is closed-loop control, which can improve the control accuracy of the moving position of the reflector 5, making the driving action of the driving assembly 6 more reliable and accurate, and ensuring the shooting quality of the camera module 10.
- the number of output gears may be one or more.
- the multiple output gears mesh with different positions of the rack 633 to synchronously drive the rack 633 to move. At this time, the rack 633 moves more smoothly.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a transmission member 634.
- One end of the transmission member 634 is connected to the rack 633.
- the other end of the transmission member 634 is connected to the reflective member 5. That is, the transmission member 634 is connected between the reflective member 5 and the rack 633.
- the transmission member 634 and the rack 633 may be integrally formed.
- the transmission member 634 and the rack 633 may also be assembled to form an integrated structure. It can be understood that in other implementation manners, the driving assembly 6 does not include the transmission member 634.
- the reflective member 5 has a transmission portion (equivalent to the aforementioned transmission member 634), and the drive assembly 6 can control the transmission portion to make the reflective member 5 in the resting position (61a, 61b, 61c). ).
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a guide rod 635.
- the guide rod 635 is fixedly connected to the module support 2.
- the extending direction of the guide rod 635 is parallel to the extending direction of the rack 633.
- the transmission member 634 is provided with a guide hole.
- the guide rod 635 passes through the guide hole.
- the guide rod 635 is used to guide the moving direction of the transmission member 634, so that the transmission member 634 can move the reflective member 5 more smoothly.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 635 and the transmission member 634 can also be achieved by providing a T-shaped block in one of the guide rod 635 and the transmission member 634, and a T-shaped groove in the other. Work together to achieve.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 635 and the transmission member 634 can also be realized by other matching structures, which is not strictly limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- the driving mode of the driving assembly 6 is a mechanical driving mode.
- the driving assembly 6 may include a motor 641, a sheave 642, a transmission rope 643, a spring fixing seat 644, and a spring 645.
- the motor 641 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the sheave 642 is connected to a motor 641, and the motor 641 is used to drive the sheave 642 to rotate.
- One end of the transmission rope 643 is fixedly connected to the reflective member 5.
- the other end of the transmission rope 643 is fixedly connected to the sheave 642.
- the motor 641 is used to drive the sheave 642 to rotate, so that the transmission rope 643 is wound on the sheave 642 or released from the sheave 642.
- the motor 641 is coupled to the processor of the electronic device 100, and the motor 641 performs corresponding operations according to the signal sent by the processor, such as forward rotation, reverse rotation, and stop rotation.
- the spring fixing seat 644 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- One end of the spring 645 is connected to or held against the spring fixing seat 644.
- the other end of the spring 645 is connected to or held against the reflective member 5.
- the transmission rope 643 When the motor 641 drives the sheave 642 to rotate in the first direction, the transmission rope 643 is wound to the sheave 642, the transmission rope 643 drives the reflective member 5 to move to the left, and in the process of driving the reflective member 5 to move, overcomes the elastic force of the spring 645, The spring 645 is compressed to enable the camera module 10 to zoom.
- the motor 641 drives the sheave 642 to rotate in a second direction opposite to the first direction the sheave 642 releases the transmission rope 643, and the reflector 5 moves to the right under the elastic force of the spring 645, so that the camera module 10 can zoom.
- the motor 641 may be a stepper motor.
- the control method of the motor 641 is closed-loop control, which can improve the control accuracy of the moving position of the reflector 5, making the driving action of the driving assembly 6 more reliable and accurate, so as to ensure the shooting quality of the camera module 10.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a spring center shaft 646.
- One end of the spring central shaft 646 is fixedly connected to the spring fixing seat 644.
- the extension direction of the spring center axis 646 is parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- the spring 645 is sleeved on the outside of the spring center shaft 646. At this time, the spring central axis 646 can restrict the movement of the spring 645 during the stretching or compression process of the spring 645, so as to avoid interference between the spring 645 and the transmission rope 643, so that the reliability of the driving assembly 6 is higher.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a transmission member 647.
- One end of the transmission member 647 is connected to the reflective member 5.
- the transmission rope 643 is connected to the other end of the transmission member 647 so as to be indirectly connected to the reflective member 5.
- the spring 645 is connected to or abuts against the other end of the conveying member so as to be indirectly connected or abutted to the reflective member 5. It can be understood that in other implementation manners, the drive assembly 6 does not include the transmission member 647.
- the reflector 5 has a transmission part (equivalent to the aforementioned transmission part 647), and the driving assembly 6 can control the transmission part so that the reflector 5 is in a plurality of stop positions (61a, 61b). , 61c).
- the end of the spring center shaft 646 away from the spring fixing seat 644 can be slidably connected to the transmission member 647 to guide and limit the transmission member 647, so that the movement of the transmission member 647 and the reflective member 5 is more stable.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a guide rod 648.
- the extending direction of the guide rod 648 is parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- the transmission member 647 is provided with a guide hole.
- the guide rod 648 passes through the guide hole.
- the guide rod 648 is used to guide the moving direction of the transmission member 647, so that the transmission member 647 can move the reflective member 5 more smoothly.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 648 and the transmission member 647 can also be achieved by providing a T-shaped block in one of the guide rod 648 and the transmission member 647, and a T-shaped groove in the other.
- the T-shaped block and the T-shaped groove Work together to achieve.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 648 and the transmission member 647 can also be realized by other matching structures, which is not strictly limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the position where the transmission member 647 is connected to the transmission rope 643 may be between the position where the transmission member 647 is connected to the guide rod 648 and the position where the transmission member 647 is connected to the spring center shaft 646. At this time, when the transmission member 647 moves, it is simultaneously restricted by the guide rod 648 and the spring central axis 646, and the movement is more stable.
- the driving assembly 6 may not be provided with the guide rod 648, and the movement direction of the transmission member 647 is limited by the spring central axis 646.
- the driving assembly 6 may also include a speed reducer (not shown in the figure).
- the reducer is connected between the motor 641 and the sheave 642.
- the reducer can reduce the output speed of the motor 641 and increase the output torque.
- the reducer can be presented as a gear box.
- spring 645 can also be replaced with other elastic members.
- FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- the driving mode of the driving assembly 6 is an electromagnetic driving mode.
- the driving assembly 6 may include an electromagnet 651 and a magnetic body 652.
- the magnetic body 652 is fixedly connected to the reflector 5.
- the electromagnet 651 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the electromagnet 651 is coupled to the processor.
- the electromagnet 651 performs corresponding operations according to the signal sent by the processor, such as generating an electromagnetic field repelling the magnetic body 652, generating an electromagnetic field attracting the magnetic body 652, and not generating an electromagnetic field.
- the electromagnetic field generated by the electromagnet 651 is controlled, that is, the magnitude and position of the magnetic force of the electromagnet 651 on the magnetic member are controlled, so that the magnetic body 652 Approaching or away from the electromagnet 651, the magnetic body 652 can drive the reflective member 5 to move to the corresponding stop position (61a, 61b, 61c), so that the camera module 10 can zoom.
- the magnetic body 652 may be a structure using a magnetic material, a permanent magnet, or an electromagnet. When the magnetic body 652 is an electromagnet, the magnetic body 652 is coupled to the processor 50.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a transmission member 653.
- the magnetic body 652 is connected to one end of the transmission member 653.
- the other end of the transmission member 653 is connected to the reflective member 5. That is, the transmission member 653 is connected between the reflective member 5 and the magnetic body 652.
- the transmission member 653 and the magnetic body 652 can be integrally formed.
- the transmission member 653 and the magnetic body 652 may also be assembled to form an integrated structure. It can be understood that in other implementation manners, the driving assembly 6 does not include the transmission member 653.
- the reflective member 5 has a transmission portion (equivalent to the aforementioned transmission member 653), and the drive assembly 6 can control the transmission portion to make the reflective member 5 in a plurality of stop positions (61a, 61b). , 61c).
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a guide rod 654.
- the guide rod 654 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the extending direction of the guide rod 654 is parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- the transmission member 653 is provided with a guide hole.
- the guide rod 654 passes through the guide hole.
- the guide rod 654 is used to guide the moving direction of the transmission member 653 so that the transmission member 653 can move the reflective member 5 more smoothly.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 654 and the transmission member 653 can also be achieved by providing a T-shaped block in one of the guide rod 654 and the transmission member 653 and a T-shaped groove in the other.
- the T-shaped block and the T-shaped groove Work together to achieve.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 654 and the transmission member 653 can also be realized by other matching structures, which is not strictly limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- the driving mode of the driving assembly 6 is an electromagnetic driving mode.
- the driving assembly 6 includes a hollow electromagnet 661 and a magnetic core 662.
- the hollow electromagnet 661 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- One end of the magnetic core 662 is fixedly connected to the reflective member 5.
- the other end of the magnetic core 662 extends into the hollow electromagnet 661.
- the hollow electromagnet 661 is coupled to the processor.
- the hollow electromagnet 661 performs corresponding operations according to the signal sent by the processor, such as generating an electromagnetic field repelling the magnetic core 662, generating an electromagnetic field attracting the magnetic core 662, and not generating an electromagnetic field.
- the electromagnetic field generated by the hollow electromagnet 661 is controlled by controlling the magnitude and direction of the energized current of the hollow electromagnet 661, that is, the size and position of the magnetic force of the hollow electromagnet 661 on the magnetic core 662 are controlled. If the magnetic core 662 is close to or far away from the electromagnet 651, the magnetic core 662 can drive the reflective member 5 to move to the corresponding stop position (61a, 61b, 61c), so that the camera module 10 can zoom.
- the magnetic core 662 may be a structure using a magnetic material, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet. When the magnetic core 662 is an electromagnet, the magnetic core 662 is coupled to the processor.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a transmission member 663.
- One end of the transmission member 663 is connected to the magnetic core 662.
- the other end of the transmission member 663 is connected to the reflective member 5. That is, the transmission member 663 is connected between the reflective member 5 and the magnetic core 662.
- the transmission member 663 and the magnetic core 662 may be integrally formed.
- the transmission member 663 and the magnetic core 662 may also be assembled to form an integrated structure. It can be understood that in other implementation manners, the drive assembly 6 does not include the transmission member 663.
- the reflective member 5 has a transmission portion (equivalent to the aforementioned transmission member 663), and the drive assembly 6 can control the transmission portion to make the reflective member 5 in a plurality of stop positions (61a, 61b). , 61c).
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a guide rod 664.
- the guide rod 664 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the extending direction of the guide rod 664 is parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- the transmission member 663 is provided with a guide hole.
- the guide rod 664 passes through the guide hole.
- the guide rod 664 is used to guide the moving direction of the transmission member 663 so that the transmission member 663 can move the reflective member 5 more smoothly.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 664 and the transmission member 663 can also be achieved by providing a T-shaped block in one of the guide rod 664 and the transmission member 663, and a T-shaped groove in the other. Work together to achieve.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 664 and the transmission member 663 can also be realized by other matching structures, which is not strictly limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- the driving mode of the driving assembly 6 is a manual adjustment type.
- the driving assembly 6 may include a transmission member 671 and a guide rod 672.
- the transmission member 671 is fixedly connected to the reflective member 5.
- the guide rod 672 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the extending direction of the guide rod 672 is parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- the transmission member 671 is provided with a guide hole.
- the guide rod 672 passes through the guide hole.
- the guide rod 672 is used to guide the moving direction of the transmission member 671 so that the transmission member 671 can move the reflective member 5 more smoothly.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 672 and the transmission member 671 can also be achieved by providing a T-shaped block in one of the guide rod 672 and the transmission member 671, and a T-shaped groove in the other.
- the T-shaped block and the T-shaped groove Work together to achieve.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 672 and the transmission member 671 can also be realized by other matching structures, which is not strictly limited in this application.
- the end of the transmission member 671 away from the reflective member 5 extends out of the module support 2.
- the end of the transmission member 671 away from the reflective member 5 is directly exposed to the outside of the electronic device 100, and the user can toggle the transmission member 671 to drive the reflective member 5 in one of the multiple stay positions (61a, 61b, 61c).
- the camera module 10 is moved to reflect the light gathered by the lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) with different equivalent focal lengths, so that the camera module 10 can zoom.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a toggle member (not shown) partially exposed to the outside of the electronic device 100. The end of the transmission member 671 away from the reflective member 5 is connected to the toggle member.
- the user can move the toggle member to drive the transmission member 671 and the reflective member 5 to move between the multiple stay positions (61a, 61b, 61c), so that the camera module Group 10 achieves zooming.
- the user can manually adjust the position of the reflective member 5 to meet the shooting requirements, making the shooting process more interesting and improving the user experience.
- the transmission member 671 (or the toggle member) can extend from the light entrance side of the camera module 10 (that is, the side where the lens group 3 is provided), or can extend from the camera module 10
- the camera module 10 extends from the non-light entering side. It is understandable that the position where the transmission member 671 (or the toggle member) extends out of the camera module 10 can be flexibly set, which is not strictly limited in this application.
- FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- the driving mode of the driving assembly 6 is a manual adjustment type.
- the driving assembly 6 may include a guide rod 681, a transmission member 682, a limiting member 683, a spring 684, a hook swing lever 685, a torsion spring 686, a hook swing lever hinge 687, a torsion spring limiting member 688 and ⁇ 689.
- the guide rod 681 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the extending direction of the guide rod 681 is parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- One end of the transmission member 682 is fixedly connected to the reflective member 5, and the other end of the transmission member 682 extends out of the module support 2.
- One end of the limiting member 683 is fixedly connected to the reflective member 5. At this time, the transmission member 682, the reflective member 5 and the limiting member 683 move or stand still in synchronization.
- One or both of the transmission member 682 and the limiting member 683 are provided with a guide hole, so as to be sleeved on the outside of the guide rod 681 through the guide hole, so as to slidably connect to the guide rod 681.
- the guide rod 681 can guide and limit the movement of the reflective member 5 through one or both of the transmission member 682 and the limiting member 683, so as to make the movement of the reflective member 5 more stable.
- the sliding connection of one or both of the transmission member 682 and the limiting member 683 and the guide rod 681 may also have other methods, such as the cooperation of a T-shaped groove and a T-shaped block.
- the hook swing lever 685 includes a rotating section 6851 and a pressing section 6852 and a limiting section 6853 connected to both ends of the rotating section 6851 respectively.
- the rotating section 6851 of the hook swing lever 685 is rotatably connected to the module bracket 2 through the hook swing lever hinge 687.
- the torsion spring limiting member 688 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the torsion spring 686 is sleeved on the outside of the hook swing lever hinge 687, and one end of the torsion spring 686 resists or connects to the torsion spring limit member 688, and the other end of the torsion spring 686 resists or connects to the limit section of the hook swing lever 685 6853.
- the limit section 6853 of the hook swing lever 685 includes a plurality of limit hooks 6854 arranged at intervals.
- the multiple limit hooks 6854 correspond to the multiple stay positions (61a, 61b, 61c), that is, the multiple limit hooks 6854 and the multiple lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) are arranged in one-to-one correspondence.
- the multiple limiting hooks 6854 are used for hooking the end of the limiting member 683 away from the reflective member 5 under the elastic force of the torsion spring 686 to limit the positions of the limiting member 683 and the reflective member 5.
- the pressing rod 689 is slidably connected to the module bracket 2. One end of the pressing rod 689 protrudes from the outside of the module support 2, and the other end is directly facing the pressing section 6852 of the hook swing rod 685.
- the spring 684 resists the limiting member 683 upward, and the torsion spring 686 exerts a counterclockwise elastic force on the limiting section 6853 of the hook swing rod 685, so that the limiting section of the hook swing rod 685
- the 6853 abuts one end of the limiting member 683, and one of the hooks of the hook swing lever 685 hooks the limiting member 683 to keep the limiting member 683 and the reflective member 5 stable.
- the user moves the transmission member 682 to the left, and the limiting member 683 moves to the left along the extending direction of the guide rod 681.
- the limiting member 683 overcomes the elastic force of the spring 684 to compress the spring 684.
- the limit piece 683 hits the right inclined surface of a hook of the hook swing lever 685, the hook swing lever 685 is forced to overcome the elastic force of the torsion spring 686 and rotate clockwise to prevent the limit piece 683 from moving to the left.
- the user pushes the pressing rod 689, the pressing rod 689 moves relative to the module bracket 2, the pressing rod 689 resists the pressing section 6852 of the hook swing lever 685 and pushes the pressing section of the hook swing lever 685 6852, the hook swing rod 685 overcomes the elastic force of the torsion spring 686 and rotates clockwise, the hook of the hook swing rod 685 releases the limit piece 683, the elastic force of the spring 684 pushes the limit piece 683 to move to the right, the limit piece 683 drives the reflector 5 to move to the right.
- the elastic force of the torsion spring 686 resets the hook pendulum rod 685, and another hook on the hook pendulum rod 685 hooks the limiting member 683 to limit
- the position member 683 and the reflective member 5 stay at a certain stop position (61a/61b/61c).
- the user can manually control the reflective member 5 to move between the multiple stay positions (61a, 61b, 61c) by controlling the transmission member 682 and the pressing lever 689, so that the camera module 10 can zoom.
- the transmission member 682 and the limiting member 683 may be two independent components, and are fixedly connected to the reflective member 5 respectively.
- the transmission member 682 may be integrally formed with the limiting member 683 or formed into an integral structure through assembly, and then the reflective member 5 may be fixedly connected. At this time, the force applied to the transmission member 682 or the limiting member 683 can be directly transmitted to each other without passing through the reflective member 5, thereby avoiding the risk of damage to the reflective member 5 due to greater force.
- the spring 684 may be a damping spring, so that the movement of the limiting member 683 and the reflective member 5 is more stable. It can be understood that in other examples, the spring 684 can also be replaced with other elastic members.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a spring positioning column 6810.
- the spring positioning column 6810 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the extension direction of the spring positioning column 6810 is parallel to the extension direction of the guide rod 681.
- the spring 684 is sleeved on the outside of the spring positioning column 6810. At this time, the spring positioning column 6810 can restrict the movement of the spring 684 during the tension or compression process of the spring 684, so as to avoid interference between the spring 684 and the hook swing lever 685, so that the reliability of the drive assembly 6 is higher.
- one or both of the reflective member 5 and the limiting member 683 can also be slidably connected to the spring positioning post 6810, and the spring positioning post 6810 and the guide rod 681 can simultaneously guide and limit the movement of the reflector 5, so that The movement of the reflective member 5 is more stable.
- the driving assembly 6 may not be provided with the spring positioning column 6810, and the spring 684 may be sleeved on the outside of the guide rod 681.
- FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- the driving mode of the driving assembly 6 is a manual-automatic integrated adjustment type.
- the driving assembly 6 includes a transmission member 691 and an automatic driving part 692.
- One end of the transmission member 691 is fixedly connected to the reflective member 5, and the other end extends out of the module bracket 2.
- the automatic driving part 692 is a motion mechanism without a self-locking function.
- the automatic driving part 692 is installed on the module bracket 2.
- the automatic driving part 692 is connected to the transmission member 691.
- the automatic driving part 692 is coupled to the processor, and is used to perform corresponding operations according to the signal sent by the processor, such as driving the transmission member 691 to move left or right.
- the drive assembly 6 integrates an automatic adjustment mode and a manual adjustment mode.
- the user can send a signal to the automatic driving part 692 through the processor, so that the automatic driving part 692 drives the transmission member 691 and the reflective member 5 to move, so that the reflective member 5 is switched between different stay positions (61a, 61b, 61c) to Reflects the light converged by the lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) with different equivalent focal lengths to achieve zooming.
- the user can also manually move the transmission member 691 to drive the reflective member 5 to move, thereby achieving zooming.
- the automatic driving part 692 may be a mechanical driving structure or an electromagnetic driving structure, etc.
- the form of the automatic driving part 692 is not strictly limited in this application.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a guide rod 693.
- the guide rod 693 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the extending direction of the guide rod 693 is parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- the transmission member 691 is provided with a guide hole.
- the guide rod 693 passes through the guide hole.
- the guide rod 693 is used to guide the moving direction of the transmission member 691, so that the transmission member 691 can move the reflective member 5 more smoothly.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 693 and the transmission member 691 can also be achieved by providing a T-shaped block in one of the guide rod 693 and the transmission member 691 and a T-shaped groove in the other.
- the T-shaped block and the T-shaped groove Work together to achieve.
- the sliding connection relationship between the guide rod 693 and the transmission member 691 can also be realized by other matching structures, which is not strictly limited in this application.
- FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3 in another example.
- the driving mode of the driving assembly 6 is a smart material deformation adjustment type.
- the driving assembly 6 includes a guide rod 6101, a transmission member 6102, a first memory alloy spring 6103, a second memory alloy spring 6104, a first excitation element 6105, and a second excitation element 6106.
- the guide rod 6101 is fixedly connected to the module bracket 2.
- the extending direction of the guide rod 6101 is parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of lenses (31a, 31b, 31c).
- One end of the transmission member 6102 is fixedly connected to the reflective member 5.
- the other end of the transmission member 6102 is slidably connected to the guide rod 6101.
- the transmission member 6102 is provided with a guide hole.
- the guide rod 6101 passes through the guide hole.
- the guide rod 6101 is used to guide the moving direction of the transmission member 6102, so that the transmission member 6102 can move the reflective member 5 more smoothly.
- the first memory alloy spring 6103 and the second memory alloy spring 6104 are arranged in a direction parallel to the guide rod 6101, and are respectively located on two sides of the transmission member 6102.
- One end of the first memory alloy spring 6103 abuts or is connected to the module support 2, and the other end abuts or is connected to the transmission member 6102.
- One end of the second memory alloy spring 6104 resists or connects to the module support 2, and the other end resists or connects to the transmission member 6102.
- the first excitation element 6105 and the second excitation element 6106 are respectively located on both sides of the transmission member 6102.
- the first excitation element 6105 is arranged corresponding to the first memory alloy spring 6103, and the second excitation element 6106 is arranged corresponding to the second memory alloy spring 6104.
- the temperature and length increase.
- the temperature of the first memory alloy spring 6103 decreases, the length is shortened and returned to its original shape.
- the second memory alloy spring 6104 is excited by the second excitation element 6106, the temperature rises and stretches.
- the temperature of the second memory alloy spring 6104 decreases, its length is shortened and returned to its original shape.
- the first memory alloy spring 6103 and the first excitation element 6105 are located on the right side of the transmission member 6102, and the second memory alloy spring 6104 and the second excitation element 6106 are located on the left side of the transmission member 6102.
- the first excitation element 6105 excites the first memory alloy spring 6103.
- the temperature and length of the first memory alloy spring 6103 increase, thereby pushing the transmission member 6102 and the reflector 5 to move to the left, and the camera module 10 Realize zooming.
- the first excitation element 6105 stops energizing the first memory alloy spring 6103
- the temperature of the first memory alloy spring 6103 is reduced and the length is shortened, and the transmission member 6102 and the reflective member 5 move to the initial position right.
- the second excitation element 6106 excites the second memory alloy spring 6104.
- the temperature and length of the second memory alloy spring 6104 increase, thereby pushing the transmission member 6102 and the reflector 5 to move right, and the camera module 10 Realize zooming.
- the second excitation element 6106 stops energizing the second memory alloy spring 6104
- the temperature of the second memory alloy spring 6104 is reduced, the length is shortened, and the transmission member 6102 and the reflective member 5 move to the left to the initial position.
- the camera module 10 controls the first memory alloy spring 6103 by the first excitation element 6105 and controls the second memory alloy spring 6104 by the second excitation element 6106 to drive the transmission member 6102 and the reflective member 5 to move.
- the reflector 5 is switched between different stay positions (61a, 61b, 61c) to reflect the light converged by the lenses (31a, 31b, 31c) with different equivalent focal lengths, thereby achieving zooming.
- the first excitation element 6105 may be electrically driven or magnetically driven.
- the temperature of the first memory alloy spring 6103 is controlled by controlling the magnitude of the current to achieve deformation.
- the first memory alloy spring 6103 is a shape memory alloy with magnetic nanoparticles.
- the first excitation element 6105 increases the size of the magnetic field, the collision between the magnetic nanoparticles in the first memory alloy spring 6103 increases, so that the generated heat increases to achieve deformation.
- the second excitation element 6106 and the second memory alloy spring 6104 please refer to the first excitation element 6105 and the first memory alloy spring 6103.
- the driving assembly 6 may further include a spring center post 6107.
- the extension direction of the spring center column 6107 is parallel to the extension direction of the guide rod 6101.
- the transmission member 6102 can be slidably connected to the spring center column 6107. At this time, the spring center column 6107 and the guide rod 6101 simultaneously guide the moving direction of the transmission member 6102, so that the movement of the transmission member 6102 is more stable.
- the first memory alloy spring 6103 is sleeved on the spring center column 6107.
- the second memory alloy spring 6104 is sleeved on the spring center column 6107.
- the spring center column 6107 can play a limiting and guiding role during the deformation of the first memory alloy spring 6103 and the second memory alloy spring 6104, so that the first memory alloy spring 6103 and the second memory alloy spring 6104 are The deformation occurs in the preset direction, so that the reliability of the driving assembly 6 is higher.
- the driving assembly 6 may not be provided with the spring center post 6107, and the first memory alloy spring 6103 and the second memory alloy spring 6104 may be sleeved on the outside of the guide rod 6101.
- FIGS. 8 to 16 are to illustrate several possible implementations of the drive assembly 6 of the camera module 10, and the drive assembly 6 of the camera module 10 may also have other implementations. This is not strictly limited.
- the position of the driving component 6 in the camera module 10 can have various embodiments, and the installation space inside the camera module 10 and the installation space outside the camera module 10 can be comprehensively considered in the design.
- the drive assembly 6 is arranged on the side of the reflector 5 away from the lens group 3.
- the lens assembly 3, the reflector 5, and the drive assembly 6 are roughly arranged in the light incident direction of the lens group 3.
- the transmission member for transmitting the driving force can be connected to the surface of the reflective member 5 facing away from the lens group 3.
- the overall shape of the camera module 10 is relatively flat, which is beneficial to the electronic device 100 using the camera module 10 Thinner.
- FIG. 17 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 in other embodiments.
- FIG. 18 is the camera shown in FIG. A schematic structural diagram of the module 10 from another angle.
- the plane where the diagram of FIG. 17 is located corresponds to the position of the A-A line of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2. The following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- the arrangement direction of the lens group 3 and the reflective element 5 is substantially perpendicular to the arrangement direction of the reflective element 5 and the driving assembly 6 (for example, the longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10).
- the light reflecting member 5 has a plane substantially parallel to the light incident direction of the lens group 3, and a transmission member for transmitting driving force can be connected to the plane.
- the arrangement of the lens group 3, the reflector 5, and the drive assembly 6 of the camera module 10 is relatively compact, the overall appearance of the camera module 10 is relatively three-dimensional, and the camera module 10 and other components of the electronic device 100 can be A more compact arrangement helps the electronic device 100 optimize the arrangement of internal components.
- FIGS. 3 and 17 are two arrangements of the structure of the camera module 10.
- the lens group 3, the reflector 5, and the drive assembly 6 can also have other arrangements. Not strictly limited.
- the camera module 10 is provided with an anti-shake component for driving the rotation of the reflective member 5 to realize optical anti-shake through the rotation compensation of the reflective member 5, so as to avoid the light caused by the shaking of the hand during the shooting process.
- the anti-shake component can be realized by a variety of driving methods, such as multi-point electromagnetic driving the reflective member 5 to rotate, mechanical driving (gear drive, link transmission) to rotate the reflective member 5, and smart material deformation to drive the reflective member 5 to rotate.
- FIG. 19 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 in some other embodiments
- FIG. 20 is a reflective member of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 19 5
- FIG. 21 is a schematic view of the internal structure of the spherical hinge of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 19.
- the plane where the diagram of FIG. 19 is located corresponds to the position of the A-A line of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2.
- the following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- the camera module 10 may further include a fixing frame 11 and an anti-shake component 9.
- the fixing frame 11 is fixedly connected to the driving assembly 6.
- the anti-shake component 9 is connected to the fixing frame 11 and the light reflecting member 5 for enabling the light reflecting member 5 to rotate relative to the fixing frame 11.
- the driving assembly 6 drives the fixing frame 11 to move
- the reflector 5 moves with the fixing frame 11.
- the anti-shake assembly 9 drives the reflective member 5 to rotate
- the reflective member 5 rotates relative to the fixed frame 11.
- the fixing frame 11 may include a first arm 111 and a second arm 112, and an included angle is formed between the first arm 111 and the second arm 112. At this time, the fixing frame 11 is substantially L-shaped.
- the first arm 111 may be parallel to the main optical axis of the lens
- the second arm 112 may be perpendicular to the main optical axis of the lens.
- the reflective member 5 when the reflective member 5 is located at the stop position 61b, it corresponds to the lens 31b.
- the first arm 111 is parallel to the main optical axis 314 of the lens 31b
- the second arm 11 is perpendicular to the main optical axis 314 of the lens 31b.
- the driving assembly 6 is fixedly connected to the second arm 112.
- the reflective member 5 is a triangular prism body.
- the reflective member 5 includes a first side edge 531 and a first surface 532 and a second surface 533 connecting the first side edge 531.
- the first surface 532 faces the first arm 111.
- the second surface 533 faces the second arm portion 112.
- the first side edge 531 is provided corresponding to the connection between the first arm 111 and the second arm 112.
- the anti-shake assembly 9 may include a spherical hinge 91 and two sets of magnetic attraction members 92.
- the spherical hinge 91 is connected between the first side edge 531 and the fixing frame 11.
- the reflector 5 can be rotated relative to the fixing frame 11 through a spherical hinge 91.
- the two sets of magnetic attraction members 92 are respectively connected between the first surface 532 and the first arm 111 and between the second surface 533 and the second arm 112.
- One set of magnetic attraction members 92 may be arranged corresponding to the end of the first surface 532 away from the first side edge 531, and another set of magnetic attraction members 92 may be arranged corresponding to the end of the second surface 533 away from the first side edge 531.
- Each group of magnetic attraction members 92 includes at least two pairs of magnetic attraction members 92. The two pairs of magnetic attraction members 92 are spaced apart from each other. The arrangement direction of the two pairs of magnetic attraction members 92 is substantially parallel to the extending direction of the first side edge 531.
- One of each pair of magnetic attraction members 92 is fixed to the fixing frame 11, and the other is fixed to the reflective member 5.
- Each pair of magnetic attraction members 92 can repel or attract each other when energized.
- each pair of magnetic attraction members 92 includes an electromagnet and a magnetic body.
- each pair of magnetic attraction members 92 may include two electromagnets.
- the reflective member 5 can be controlled to rotate in three degrees of freedom, and the reflective member 5 can respectively rotate around the width direction of the camera module 10.
- X, the length direction Y of the camera module 10 and the thickness direction Z of the camera module 10 rotate, and the driving component 6 can drive the reflector 5 to move along the width direction X of the camera module 10, so the reflection of the camera module 10
- the component 5 can realize the anti-shake of four degrees of freedom, and the shooting quality of the camera module 10 is better.
- the structure of the fixing frame 11 and the reflector 5 may be correspondingly arranged to form a movable space between the first arm 111 and the first surface 532, and a movable space is formed between the second arm 112 and the second surface 533. space.
- the spherical hinge 91 may include a fixed portion 911, a rotating portion 912, and a connecting portion 913.
- the fixing portion 911 is fixed to the fixing frame 11.
- the fixing part 911 may be fixed at the junction of the first arm part 111 and the second arm part 112.
- the rotating part 912 is rotatably installed inside the fixed part 911.
- One end of the connecting portion 913 is connected to the rotating portion 912, and the other end is connected to the reflector 5.
- the anti-shake assembly 9 shown in FIGS. 19-21 can also be applied to the camera module 10 in other embodiments of the present application, such as the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 3, the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 19, etc. .
- the photosensitive surface 41 of the image sensor 4 is perpendicular to the equivalent central plane of each lens (31a, 31b, 31c) of the lens group 3.
- the reflective layer 51 of the reflective member 5 forms an angle of 45° with the main optical axis of the lens (31a, 31b, 31c).
- the reflective layer 51 of the reflective member 5 is used to reflect light.
- the light converged by each lens (31a, 31b, 31c) is reflected by the reflector 5, and then enters the image sensor 4 after being deflected by 90°.
- the light can make full use of the verticality of the camera module 10 during the propagation process.
- the space in the two directions that is, the direction of the main optical axis of the lens (31a, 31b, 31c) and the space in the vertical direction of the photosensitive surface 41 of the image sensor 4, so that the arrangement of the components in the camera module 10 The location is more optimized.
- FIG. 22 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 in still other embodiments. The following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- the photosensitive surface 41 of the image sensor 4 is parallel to the equivalent central surface of each lens (31a, 31b, 31c) of the lens group 3.
- the equivalent center plane of the lens is the plane where the diameter of the equivalent optical center passing through the lens is located.
- the camera module 10 further includes a reflector 12 for reflecting the light reflected by the reflector 5 to the image sensor 4.
- the reflective member 5 is located at the stop 61b, the reflective layer 51 of the reflective member 5 and the main optical axis 314 of the lens 31b form an angle of 45°, and the reflective layer 121 of the reflective member 12 is perpendicular to the reflection of the reflective member 5.
- the reflective layer 51 of the reflective member 5 is used to reflect light.
- the reflective layer 121 of the reflective member 12 is used to reflect light.
- the light passing through the lens is sequentially reflected by the reflective member 5 and the reflective member 12, and then enters the image sensor 4 after being deflected by 180°.
- this embodiment increases the number of reflective components (including the reflective member 5 and the reflective member 12) to cause the light to be deflected multiple times, which not only makes the arrangement position of the image sensor 4 more flexible, but also facilitates improvement.
- the flexibility of the arrangement of the components of the camera module 10 also makes the propagation path of light longer.
- the camera module 10 can be provided with a lens with a larger focal length, thereby realizing telephoto shooting or ultra-telephoto shooting.
- the number of reflective parts such as the light reflector 5 or the reflector 12 may also be two or more than three, which is not strictly limited in this application. "Above” in this application includes the number. There may also be other relationships between the position of the reflecting member 5 or the reflecting member 12 and the position of the equivalent central plane of the lens, which is not strictly limited in this application.
- the position of the photosensitive surface 41 of the image sensor 4 can be changed by adjusting the number and position of the reflective components, that is, the position of the image sensor 4
- the positional relationship between the photosensitive surface 41 and the equivalent central plane of the lens of the lens group 3 changes, so that the camera module 10 can realize more various structural solutions and forms, and has a wider application range.
- FIG. 23 is a rear view of an electronic device 100 according to another embodiment of the present application. The following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- FIG. 23 illustrates another exemplary arrangement of the multiple lenses 31 of the lens group 3: the multiple lenses 31 have the same light incident direction, and the multiple lenses 31 are arranged in an array.
- the plurality of lenses 31 include at least two lenses with different equivalent focal lengths.
- the structure of the lens 31 can refer to the lens (31a, 31b, 31c) in the embodiment of FIG. 3 described above.
- the plurality of lenses 31 are arranged in rows in the width direction X of the camera module 10 and arranged in rows in the longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10.
- FIG. 24 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 23 in some embodiments
- FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 24 .
- the camera module 10 includes a plurality of image sensors 4, a plurality of reflectors 5 and a plurality of groups of driving components 6.
- Each row of lenses 31 arranged in the width direction X of the camera module 10 corresponds to an image sensor 4, a reflector 5, and a set of driving components 6, which drive the corresponding reflector 5 along the width of the camera module 10 Move in direction X.
- the equivalent focal lengths of the lenses 31 of the same row arranged in the width direction X of the camera module 10 are different.
- the plurality of driving components 6 are coupled to the processor 50 (refer to FIG. 23 ), and the plurality of image sensors 4 are coupled to the processor 50. Since different driving components 6 can drive different reflectors 5 independently of each other, and multiple image sensors 4 can work independently of each other, the camera module 10 can enable a certain group of driving components 6 and image sensors 4 to work independently to capture one For images, multiple groups of driving components 6 and image sensors 4 can also work simultaneously to capture multiple images, and the shooting modes of the camera module 10 are more diverse.
- the equivalent focal lengths of the lenses 31 in the same column arranged in the length direction Y of the camera module 10 may be the same.
- the camera module 10 can synthesize a target image from multiple images captured by the same column of lenses 31 to improve the image quality of the target image.
- the multiple rows of module structures (including equivalent focal length, aperture, brightness, etc.) arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10 may be the same.
- the module structure includes a lens 31, a reflector 5, an image sensor 4 and so on.
- the camera module 10 can realize 3D shooting. For example, when a plurality of reflectors 5 are aligned with each other in the length direction Y of the camera module 10, the plurality of image sensors 4 of the camera module 10 simultaneously capture images in the same scene through the corresponding lens 31, and by comparing the multiple images Edit and integrate to form 3D images.
- the camera module 10 can also achieve optical zooming of 3D images.
- a column of lenses 31 arranged in the longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10 corresponds to an image sensor 4, a reflective member 5, and a group of driving components 6, and the driving component 6 drives the reflective member 5 along The longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10 moves.
- the equivalent focal lengths of the lenses 31 of the same row arranged in the longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10 are different.
- FIG. 26 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 23 in other embodiments
- FIG. 27 is the internal structure of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 26 Schematic. The following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- the camera module 10 may include a plurality of image sensors 4, a reflector 5 and a group of driving components 6. Each row of lenses 31 arranged in the width direction X of the camera module 10 corresponds to one image sensor 4.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move.
- the driving assembly 6 includes a first driving part 6a and a second driving part 6b.
- the first driving part 6 a is used for driving the reflective member 5 to move in the length direction Y of the camera module 10
- the second driving part 6 b is used for driving the reflective member 5 to move in the width direction X of the camera module 10.
- the reflector 5 can move between the plurality of stop positions 61 corresponding to the plurality of lenses 31, so that the camera module 10 can zoom.
- the stay position 61 please refer to the relevant description of the stay position (61a, 61b, 61c) in the embodiment of FIG.
- the distances between the lenses 31 of different rows and the image sensor 4 may be different, and the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses of the lens group 3 may be different from each other.
- the plurality of image sensors 4 are arranged staggered in the longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10.
- the camera module 10 shown in this embodiment has more diversified shooting modes than the camera module 10 shown in the foregoing embodiment, which can improve user experience.
- the equivalent focal lengths of the lenses 31 in the same column arranged in the longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10 may be the same.
- the plurality of image sensors 4 are arranged in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10.
- FIG. 28 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 23 in still other embodiments
- FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 28. The following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- the camera module 10 may include an image sensor 4, a reflector 5 and a set of driving components 6.
- the image sensor 4 is located on one side of the lens group 3 and close to the middle.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move and rotate.
- the driving assembly 6 includes a first driving part 6c, a second driving part 6d, and a third driving part 6e.
- the first driving part 6c is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move in a first direction
- the second driving part 6d is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move in a second direction
- the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction
- the third driving part 6e is used to The reflective member 5 is driven to rotate around a third direction
- the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction.
- the first driving part 6c is used to drive the reflector 5 to move in the length direction Y of the camera module 10
- the second driving part 6d is used to drive the reflector 5 to move in the width direction X of the camera module 10.
- the third driving part 6e is used to drive the reflector 5 to rotate around the thickness direction Z of the camera module 10.
- the first driving part 6c cooperates with the second driving part 6d to move the reflector 5 to a position facing the target lens 31, and the third driving part 6e drives the reflector 5 to rotate, which can make the reflective
- the piece 5 rotates to the target stop position 61. Since the reflector 5 can be rotated, the light converged by different lenses 31 can be reflected in different directions, so the camera module 10 can reflect the light converged by the lenses 31 at different positions to the same image sensor 4 through the rotatable reflector 5 . Therefore, through the cooperation of the first driving part 6c, the second driving part 6d, and the third driving part 6e, the reflector 5 can switch between the plurality of stay positions 61 corresponding to the plurality of lenses 31, and will pass through the lens 31.
- the light reflected to the same image sensor 4 makes the camera module 10 zoom.
- the area of the photosensitive surface 41 of the image sensor 4 may be the same, similar, or increase in a small amount compared with the foregoing embodiment.
- the processor may be provided with an image distortion correction unit.
- the image distortion correction unit is used to correct the image received by the image sensor 4 to overcome the problem of distortion of the image received by the image sensor 4 due to the fact that the lens 31, the reflector 5, and the image sensor 4 are not in the same plane, thereby ensuring the electronic device 100 The shooting quality.
- the camera module 10 may be provided with an internal processor, the internal processor of the camera module 10 is coupled to the processor of the electronic device 100, and the image distortion correction unit may be provided on the internal processor of the camera module 10.
- the equivalent focal lengths of the lenses 31 of the same column arranged in the longitudinal direction Y of the camera module 10 may be the same.
- the position of the image sensor 4 is set so that the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses 31 are different from each other. At this time, the camera module 10 has more diversified shooting modes, which can improve user experience.
- FIG. 30 is a rear view of an electronic device 100 according to another embodiment of the present application.
- the following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- FIG. 30 illustrates yet another exemplary arrangement of the multiple lenses 31 of the lens group 3: the multiple lenses 31 have the same light incident direction, and the multiple lenses 31 are arranged in a ring shape.
- the plurality of lenses 31 include at least two lenses with different equivalent focal lengths.
- the structure of the lens 31 can refer to the lens (31a, 31b, 31c) in the embodiment of FIG. 3 described above.
- the ring shape can be a circular ring shape as shown in FIG. 30, an elliptical ring shape or other rings.
- FIG. 31 is a partial structural diagram of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 30 in some embodiments
- FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 31 .
- the camera module 10 includes an image sensor 4, a reflector 5 and a set of driving components 6.
- the image sensor 4 is located on one side of the lens group 3.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move and rotate.
- the driving assembly 6 includes a first driving part 6f, a second driving part 6g, and a third driving part 6h.
- the first driving part 6f is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move in a first direction
- the second driving part 6g is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move in a second direction
- the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction
- the third drive part 6h is used to
- the reflective member 5 is driven to rotate around a third direction
- the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction.
- the reflector 5 can move between the plurality of stop positions 61 corresponding to the plurality of lenses 31, and the light passing through the lens 31 It is reflected to the image sensor 4, so that the camera module 10 achieves zooming.
- the stay position 61 please refer to the relevant description of the stay position (61a, 61b, 61c) in the embodiment of FIG.
- the first driving part 6f is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move in the length direction Y of the camera module 10
- the second driving part 6g is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move in the width direction X of the camera module 10.
- the third driving part 6h is used to drive the reflector 5 to rotate around the thickness direction Z of the camera module 10.
- the processor 50 (refer to FIG. 30) of the electronic device 100 is provided with an image distortion correction unit.
- the image distortion correction unit is used to correct the image received by the image sensor 4 to overcome the problem of distortion of the image received by the image sensor 4 due to the fact that the lens 31, the reflector 5, and the image sensor 4 are not in the same plane, thereby ensuring the electronic device 100 The shooting quality.
- the camera module 10 may be provided with an internal processor, the internal processor of the camera module 10 is coupled to the processor 50 of the electronic device 100, and the image distortion correction unit may be provided on the internal processor of the camera module 10.
- the arrangement of the multiple lenses may also be: the light incident direction of the multiple lenses is the same, and the multiple lenses are arranged in a triangle.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move and rotate.
- the image sensor 4, the reflector 5, and the driving assembly 6 of the camera module 10 can be configured with reference to the foregoing embodiment.
- FIG. 33 is a front view of an electronic device 100 according to still another embodiment of the present application. The following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- the housing 20 of the electronic device 100 includes a main housing 201 and a movable housing 202.
- the movable shell 202 is telescopically mounted on the main shell 201.
- the electronic device 100 further includes a housing drive assembly 203 installed on the main housing 201, and the housing drive assembly 203 is used to drive the movable housing 202 to extend or retract relative to the main housing 201.
- the movable shell portion 202 may be slidably connected to the main shell portion 201 to slide out of the main shell portion 201 or slide into the main shell portion 201.
- the movable shell portion 202 can be rotatably connected to the main shell portion 201 to rotate out of the main shell portion 201 or into the main shell portion 201.
- the camera module 10 is installed on the movable housing 202. The camera module 10 moves with the movable housing 202.
- the main housing 201 of the electronic device 100 may not reserve a camera hole or a camera area corresponding to the camera module 10, but can be designed with a full board, such as a full screen design, a full back cover design, and so on.
- the camera module 10 can collect an image in front of the electronic device 100. At this time, the camera module 10 is used as a front camera of the electronic device 100. Alternatively, the camera module 10 can capture an image behind the electronic device 100. At this time, the camera module 10 is used as a rear camera of the electronic device 100.
- FIG. 34 is a front view of an electronic device 100 according to still another embodiment of the present application. The following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- the housing 20 of the electronic device 100 includes a main housing 201 and a movable housing 202.
- the movable shell 202 is telescopically mounted on the main shell 201. After the movable shell portion 202 extends relative to the main shell portion 201, it can rotate relative to the main shell portion 201.
- the electronic device 100 further includes a housing drive assembly 203, which is mounted on the main housing 201.
- the housing drive assembly 203 is used to drive the movable housing 202 to extend or retract relative to the main housing 201 and to drive the movable housing.
- the portion 202 extends relative to the main housing portion 201 and then rotates.
- the movable shell portion 202 may be slidably connected to the main shell portion 201 to slide out of the main shell portion 201 or slide into the main shell portion 201, and can rotate relative to the main shell portion 201 after sliding out of the main shell portion 201.
- the movable shell 202 can be rotatably connected to the main shell 201 to rotate out of the main shell 201 or into the main shell 201, and can rotate relative to the main shell 201 after being rotated out of the main shell 201.
- the camera module 10 is installed on the movable housing 202. The camera module 10 moves with the movable housing 202.
- the camera module 10 can expand and contract with the movable housing 202 relative to the main housing 201, the camera module 10 can be extended to expose the lens set 3 to the outside of the electronic device 100 when shooting is required. In this way, images are collected, and the camera module 10 is retracted so that the lens group 3 is located inside the electronic device 100 when no shooting is required. Therefore, the main housing 201 of the electronic device 100 may not reserve a camera hole or a camera area corresponding to the camera module 10, but can be designed with a full board, such as a full screen design, a full back cover design, and so on. Since the movable housing 202 can be rotated relative to the main housing 201 after being extended relative to the main housing 201, the camera module 10 can be used as a front camera of the electronic device 100 or a rear camera of the electronic device 100.
- the housing 20 of the electronic device 100 may also be a foldable housing.
- the foldable housing includes two flat plate parts and a curved part connected between the two flat plate parts.
- the module 10 can be installed on one of the flat plate parts.
- FIG. 35 is a side view of an electronic device 100 according to still another embodiment of the present application.
- the following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- FIG. 35 illustrates still another exemplary arrangement of multiple lenses of the lens group 3: the multiple lenses have different light incident directions.
- the plurality of lenses includes a first lens 33 and a second lens 34.
- the structure of the first lens 33 and the second lens 34 can refer to the lens (31a, 31b, 31c) in the embodiment of FIG. 3 described above.
- the first lens 33 and the second lens 34 are arranged back to back and have opposite light incident directions.
- the first lens 33 can capture an image in front of the electronic device 100
- the second lens 34 can capture an image in the back of the electronic device 100.
- the camera module 10 can be used as a front camera of the electronic device 100 or can be used as a rear camera of the electronic device 100.
- the equivalent focal length of the first lens 33 and the equivalent focal length of the second lens 34 are different. At this time, the camera module 10 can not only switch the shooting direction, but also achieve zooming by switching the stop position of the reflective member. In other embodiments, the equivalent focal length of the first lens 33 is the same as the equivalent focal length of the second lens 34.
- the number of lenses with different light incident directions of the lens group 3 may also be more than three, and the light incident directions of the lenses of the lens group 3 may also have other design solutions.
- FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 35
- FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of the structure shown in FIG. 36 from another angle.
- a plurality of lenses are arranged around the periphery of the reflective member 5.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to rotate.
- the first lens 33 and the second lens 34 are respectively located on opposite sides of the reflector 5.
- the driving assembly 6 can drive the reflector 5 to rotate between two stop positions (61d, 61f) facing the two lenses (33, 34) respectively.
- the staying position 61d corresponds to the lens 33, and when the reflective member 5 is located at the staying position 61d, the light collected by the lens 33 can be reflected to the image sensor 4.
- the stop position 61f corresponds to the lens 34, and when the reflector 5 is located at the stop position 61f, the light condensed by the lens 34 can be reflected to the image sensor 4.
- the direction of the rotation axis of the reflective member 5 is perpendicular to the connecting direction of the first lens 33 and the second lens 34.
- the driving assembly 6 drives the reflective member 5 to rotate around its rotation axis.
- the reflector 5 can be rotated to collect light converged by different lenses, so the camera module 10 can achieve multi-directional shooting and more diverse shooting functions .
- the driving assembly 6 includes a motor 6111 and a rotating shaft 6112. One end of the rotating shaft 6112 is connected to the motor 6111, and the other end is fixedly connected to the reflector 5.
- the motor 6111 is used to drive the rotating shaft 6112 to rotate, so as to drive the reflective member 5 to rotate.
- the motor 6111 is fixedly installed on the module bracket 2.
- the module support 2 may also include a limit plate (not shown in the figure).
- the rotating shaft 6112 passes through the limiting plate and is rotatably connected to the limiting plate.
- the rotating shaft 6112 and the limiting plate can be connected by a bearing.
- the limit plate can support and limit the rotation shaft 6112, so that the reliability of the driving assembly 6 is higher.
- the driving assembly 6 may also include a gear set (not shown in the figure).
- the gear set includes a plurality of gears meshingly connected with each other.
- One of the gears of the gear set is an input gear, and the input gear is fixedly connected to the motor 6111.
- One of the gears of the gear set is an output gear, and the output gear is fixedly connected to the rotating shaft 6112.
- the gear set can transmit the power of the motor 6111 to the rotating shaft 6112. By designing the number of teeth of the gears in the gear set, the ratio of the output speed of the motor 6111 to the speed of the shaft 6112 can be adjusted, thereby reducing the output speed of the motor 6111 and increasing the output torque.
- the orientation of the reflective layer 51 of the reflective member 5 can be changed, so that the position of the image sensor 4 can be realized in multiple ways.
- the light converged by the lenses (33, 34) is reflected by the reflective layer 51 of the reflective member 5 and then transmitted on the YZ plane.
- the YZ plane is the plane where the length direction Y and the thickness direction Z of the camera module 10 are located.
- the photosensitive surface 41 of the image sensor 4 is parallel to the XZ plane, which is the plane where the width direction X and the thickness direction Z of the camera module 10 are located.
- the light converged by the lens is reflected by the reflective layer 51 of the reflective member 5 and then transmitted on the XZ plane, and the photosensitive surface 41 of the image sensor 4 is parallel to the YZ plane.
- FIG. 38 is a side view of an electronic device 100 according to still another embodiment of the present application. The following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- FIG. 38 illustrates another exemplary arrangement of multiple lenses of the lens group 3: the lens group 3 includes at least two groups of sub-lens groups 35 with different light incident directions. Each sub-lens group 35 includes a plurality of lenses 31 with the same light incidence and different equivalent focal lengths.
- the structure of the lens 31 can refer to the lens (31a, 31b, 31c) in the embodiment of FIG. 3 described above.
- the arrangement of the multiple lenses 31 in each sub-lens group 35 can refer to the foregoing embodiment. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the multiple lenses 31 of the sub-lens group 35 is the same as that of the foregoing embodiment as an example for description.
- one of the two sub-lens groups 35 can capture images in front of the electronic device 100, and the other sub-lens group 35 can capture images in the back of the electronic device 100. That is, the lens group 3 has two shooting directions in opposite directions.
- the camera module 10 can be used as a front camera of the electronic device 100 or can be used as a rear camera of the electronic device 100.
- the light incident direction of the two sub-lens groups 35 may also have other design solutions.
- the display screen 30 is provided with a light-transmitting hole or a light-transmitting part, and the camera module 10 is located under the display screen 30, and a group of sub-lens group 35 shoots through the light-transmitting hole or the light-transmitting part to realize the under-screen Shoot.
- the camera module 10 performs shooting through the non-display area of the display screen 30.
- the display screen 30 may be a notch screen or a water drop screen.
- the non-display area of the display screen 30 includes a notch area or a water drop area.
- the display screen 30 may also be a relatively regular rectangular screen. In this case, the top space or the bottom space of the display screen 30 forms a non-display area.
- the back cover of the electronic device 100 has a camera hole, and the other group of sub-lens group 35 performs shooting through the camera hole.
- the back cover of the electronic device 100 is provided with a light-transmitting area, and another group of sub-lens group 35 takes pictures through the light-transmitting area, and the back cover of the electronic device 100 can realize a comprehensive panel design.
- the equivalent focal lengths of the lenses 31 of the two sub-lens groups 35 may be the same or different.
- the two sub-lens groups 35 are respectively a first sub-lens group and a second sub-lens group.
- the number of lenses in the first sub-lens group is the same as the number of lenses in the second sub-lens group.
- the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses in the first sub-lens group are the same as the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses in the second sub-lens group in a one-to-one correspondence.
- the equivalent focal lengths of some of the lenses in the first sub-lens group are the same as those of the second sub-lens group, and the equivalent focal lengths of the remaining lenses in the first sub-lens group are the same as those of the second sub-lens group.
- the equivalent focal lengths of other lenses in the sub-lens group are different.
- the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses in the first sub-lens group are different from the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses in the second sub-lens group.
- the number of lenses in the first sub-lens group is different from the number of lenses in the second sub-lens group.
- FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 38
- FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram of the structure shown in FIG. 39 from another angle.
- the reflector 5 is located between the two sub-lens groups 35.
- the two sub-lens groups 35 are arranged back to back.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move and rotate.
- the stay positions of the camera module 10 include two sets of stay positions 61 corresponding to two sets of sub-lens groups 35.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to rotate to switch between the two sets of stay positions 61; the drive assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move to switch between multiple stay positions 61 of the same set of stay positions 61.
- the stay position 61 please refer to the relevant description of the stay position (61a, 61b, 61c) in the embodiment of FIG.
- each sub-lens group 35 since the two groups of sub-lens groups 35 have different light incident directions, each sub-lens group 35 includes a plurality of lenses 31 with different equivalent focal lengths, and the driving assembly 6 can drive the reflective member 5 to move and rotate to Switching between different stay positions 61 enables the image sensor 4 to receive the light converged by each lens 31, so the camera module 10 can achieve both zoom shooting and multi-directional shooting, and the camera module 10 has more diverse functions ⁇ .
- the driving assembly 6 includes a driving moving assembly 6121, a connecting rod 6122, a motor board 6123, a motor 6124, a gear set 6125 and a rotating shaft 6126.
- the driving and moving component 6121 is installed on the module bracket 2.
- One end of the connecting rod 6122 is connected to the driving and moving assembly 6121, and the driving and moving assembly 6121 is used to drive the connecting rod 6122 to move.
- the driving and moving component 6121 can be based on the arrangement of the multiple lenses 31 in a single sub-lens group 35, and correspondingly refer to the structure of the driving component 6 in the foregoing embodiment.
- the motor board 6123 is connected to the other end of the connecting rod 6122.
- the motor 6124 is installed on the motor board 6123.
- the rotating shaft 6126 passes through the motor plate 6123 and is rotatably connected to the motor plate 6123.
- the rotating shaft 6126 and the motor board 6123 can be connected through a bearing. At this time, the motor board 6123 can support and limit the rotation shaft 6126, so that the reliability of the drive assembly 6 is higher.
- the motor 6124 and one end of the rotating shaft 6126 are connected through a gear set 6125. The other end of the rotating shaft 6126 is connected to the reflective member 5.
- the gear set 6125 includes a plurality of gears meshingly connected with each other.
- One of the gears of the gear set 6125 is an input gear, and the input gear is fixedly connected to the motor 6124.
- One of the gears of the gear set 6125 is an output gear, and the output gear is fixedly connected to the rotating shaft 6126.
- the gear set 6125 can transmit the power of the motor 6124 to the rotating shaft 6126.
- one driving assembly 6 drives one reflector 5 to move (move and rotate), so as to meet the shooting requirements of the two sub-lens groups 35.
- the number of image sensors can be two, or two image sensors can be combined into one image sensor with a larger area. The embodiment of the application does not make a strict limitation on this.
- the housing 20 of the electronic device 100 is illustrated as an integrated structure after assembly, and the camera module 10 is fixed relative to the display screen 30 after being installed in the housing 20.
- the housing 20 of the electronic device 100 includes a main housing and a movable housing.
- the movable shell part is telescopically installed on the main shell part 201.
- the camera module 10 is installed on the movable housing.
- both the display screen 30 and the back cover of the electronic device 100 can realize a full-board design.
- the housing 20 of the electronic device 100 may also be a foldable housing.
- the foldable housing includes two flat plate parts and a curved part connected between the two flat plate parts.
- the camera module 10 can be mounted on One of the flat parts.
- FIG. 41 is a front view of an electronic device 100 according to still another embodiment of the present application. The following mainly describes the differences between this embodiment and the foregoing embodiment, and most of the technical content of this embodiment that is the same as the foregoing embodiment will not be repeated hereafter.
- the electronic device 100 is a panoramic camera as an example for description. Panoramic cameras can be used in UAV systems, deep-sea or high-altitude detection systems, monitoring systems, etc. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also be an electronic eye and other devices that have multiple shooting requirements.
- the electronic device 100 includes a camera module 10 and a housing 70.
- the camera module 10 is installed in the housing 70.
- the multiple lenses 31 of the lens group of the camera module 10 have different light incident directions.
- the structure of the lens 31 can refer to the lens (31a, 31b, 31c) in the embodiment of FIG. 3 described above.
- a plurality of lenses 31 are arranged around the periphery of the reflective member 5.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to rotate.
- the number of lenses 31 is more than two, and the lens group has more than three light incident directions.
- the module bracket of the camera module 10 can completely seal the other components of the camera module 10 on its inside.
- the lens group does not need to be moved, but is realized by the rotation of the reflector 5 located inside the module bracket.
- the zoom greatly improves the tightness of the camera module 10.
- the camera module 10 has a long service life and high reliability, and can be suitable for environments that require extreme conditions such as waterproof, dustproof, and high pressure.
- the plurality of lenses 31 may include at least two lenses with different equivalent focal lengths. In other embodiments, the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses 31 are the same.
- FIG. 42 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 41 in various embodiments.
- the plane of the diagram in FIG. 42 corresponds to the position of the line B-B in FIG. 41.
- the module bracket 2 of the camera module 10 may be in the shape of a triangular prism as a whole or partly in the shape of a triangular prism, and the three lenses 31 of the lens group are respectively installed on the three sides of the triangular prism.
- the camera module 10 has three shooting angles.
- the reflector 5 is rotatably located at the center of the three lenses 31.
- the module holder 2 of the camera module 10 may be in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped as a whole or partially in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped.
- the four lenses 31 of the lens group are respectively mounted on the four sides of the rectangular parallelepiped, and the camera module 10 has four cameras.
- the reflector 5 is rotatably located at the center of the four lenses 31.
- the module holder 2 of the camera module 10 may be cylindrical as a whole or partially cylindrical, and a plurality of lenses 31 (for example, four or six in the figure) of the lens group may be evenly arranged on the cylinder.
- a plurality of lenses 31 for example, four or six in the figure
- the reflector 5 is rotatably located at the center of the plurality of lenses 31.
- the module bracket 2 of the camera module 10 may have other shapes, such as a hexagonal column shape, an elliptical column shape, etc., and the plurality of lenses 31 of the lens group may also have other arrangement structures, which is not strictly in this application. limited.
- multiple lenses 31 may also be arranged on each side of the module bracket 2 of the camera module 10, and the arrangement of the multiple lenses 31 is not strictly limited.
- the lens group 3 includes at least two sub-lens groups with different light incident directions, each sub-lens group includes a plurality of lenses 31 with the same light incident direction and different equivalent focal lengths, and the reflector 5 is located between the two sub-lens groups ,
- the driving assembly is used to drive the reflective member 5 to move and rotate.
- the camera module 10 can increase the change of focal length during the 3D shooting process, and obtain different perspectives of shooting. At the same time, it also cooperates with the capturing action of the telephoto lens 31 for distant objects, so that the captured images of the distant objects can have more detailed 3D changes.
- the image sensor 4 of the camera module 10 may be located in the direction of the rotation axis of the reflective member 5, and the photosensitive surface of the image sensor 4 is substantially perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis of the reflective member 5.
- FIG. 43 is a schematic structural diagram of the camera module 10 of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 41 in other embodiments
- FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the camera module 10 shown in FIG. 43 .
- the plane of the diagram in FIG. 44 corresponds to the position of the line C-C in FIG. 43.
- the multiple lenses 31 of the lens group of the camera module 10 have different light incident directions.
- the structure of the lens 31 can refer to the lens (31a, 31b, 31c) in the embodiment of FIG. 3 described above.
- a plurality of lenses 31 are arranged around the periphery of the reflective member 5.
- the driving assembly 6 is used to drive the reflective member 5 to rotate and move.
- the plurality of lenses 31 of the lens group 3 may be arranged roughly in a spherical or ellipsoidal surface to have more field of view angles.
- the plurality of lenses 31 may include at least two lenses with different equivalent focal lengths. In other embodiments, the equivalent focal lengths of the multiple lenses 31 are the same.
- the driving assembly 6 includes a rotating shaft mechanism 6m, a slider mechanism 6n, and a reflector rotating mechanism 6o.
- the rotating shaft mechanism 6m includes a rotating shaft and a first driving member. The extending direction of the rotating shaft is perpendicular to the photosensitive surface 41 of the image sensor 4, and the first driving member is used to drive the rotating shaft to rotate.
- the slider mechanism 6n includes a slider and a second driving member. The slider is sleeved on the outside of the rotating shaft. The second driving member is used to drive the slider to slide in a direction perpendicular to the photosensitive surface 41 of the image sensor 4 relative to the rotating shaft.
- the reflective member rotating mechanism 6o includes a rotating hinge and a third driving member.
- the rotating hinge connects the reflective member 5 and the slider, and the third driving member is used to drive the reflective member 5 to rotate relative to the slider.
- the driving component 6 can drive the reflector 5 to switch between multiple stay positions corresponding to the multiple lenses 31, so that the camera module 10 can zoom.
- the driving assembly drives the reflective element to switch between a plurality of stop positions, which is explained by taking the step adjustment of the position of the reflective element by the drive assembly as an example.
- the adjustment of the reflector by the driving assembly may also be stepless adjustment.
- the reflector can also stay between adjacent staying positions. At this time, the light collected by the lens corresponding to one or more stay positions adjacent to the current stay position of the reflective element can be reflected by the reflective element to the image sensor. In this way, the shooting methods of the camera module are more diversified, which can improve the user's shooting experience.
- the camera module includes a movable reflector and a plurality of lenses.
- the drive assembly drives the reflector to move to change the position of the reflector.
- the reflector can change at least one of the multiple lenses.
- the concentrated light is reflected to the image sensor, which not only meets a variety of shooting requirements, but also reduces the cost of the camera module.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Studio Devices (AREA)
Abstract
本申请实施例公开一种摄像模组,包括镜头组、图像传感器、反光件以及驱动组件,镜头组包括多个镜头,反光件用于将多个镜头中的至少一个镜头汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器,驱动组件用于驱动反光件活动。上述摄像模组的成本较低。本申请实施例还公开一种电子设备。
Description
本申请要求在2019年5月10日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201910387745.0的中国专利申请的优先权,发明名称为“一种潜望式有级光学变焦摄像头模组及移动终端”的中国专利申请的优先权,在2019年8月12日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201910738974.2的中国专利申请的优先权,发明名称为“摄像模组及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
本申请实施例涉及摄像技术领域,尤其涉及一种摄像模组及电子设备。
目前,电子设备(例如手机等)为了提高拍摄功能的多样性,通常设置有多个各自独立的摄像模组,以满足不同的拍摄需求,导致了电子设备的成本大幅度增加。
发明内容
本申请的目的在于提供了一种成本较低的摄像模组和电子设备。
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种摄像模组。摄像模组包括镜头组、图像传感器、反光件以及驱动组件。镜头组包括多个镜头。反光件用于将多个镜头中的至少一个镜头汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器。“至少一个”包括一个或多个的情况。驱动组件用于驱动反光件活动。换言之,驱动组件能够驱动反光件在不同的位置之间活动。
在本实施例中,当驱动组件驱动反光件活动到不同的位置时,反光件能够将不同的镜头汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器,因此图像传感器可以通过反光件的位置变化,采集到多种不同的图像。也即,摄像模组将多个镜头集成到一个模组中,通过反光件的位置变化,共用一个图像传感器,以同时具备多种不同的拍摄功能,相较于传统的设置多个摄像模组的方案,本实施例的摄像模组的成本大幅度降低。
由于反光件位于镜头组与图像传感器之间,相较于光线由镜头组直接进入图像传感器的光路路径,光线由镜头组射向反光件、而后反光件将光线反射至图像传感器的光路路径的长度更长,也即反光件的设置增长了光线路径,使得摄像模组能够采用等效焦距更长的镜头,以获得长焦拍摄功能、甚至超长焦拍摄功能。
由于反光件能够改变光路方向,因此镜头组与图像传感器的相对位置能够灵活设计,故而摄像模组能够进一步通过设计镜头组中镜头的位置和图像传感器的位置,减小摄像模组的整体体积。例如,相较于传统的潜望式镜头模组,本实施例的摄像模组的镜头组中的镜头平铺设计,镜头的直径大小不会影响到摄像模组的厚度尺寸有利于摄像模组薄型化。
由于摄像模组通过改变反光件的位置来传递不同的镜头汇聚的光线,因此避免了精密度要求较高的镜头组中镜头的位移,镜头能够固定于摄像模组的模组支架,为摄像模组中固定不动的部件,从而保证了摄像模组的可靠性。
再者,由于摄像模组的整体体积能够得到合理控制,因此摄像模组在不大幅度增加体积的情况下,采用较大口径的镜头,以获取更多的采光量,使得摄像模组的拍摄质量更高,也便于夜间拍摄或灰暗环境中拍摄。
一些实施例中,多个镜头的等效焦距不同。这样,摄像模组通过改变反光件所在的停留位,切换图像传感器所采集光线所经过的镜头,镜头具有其对应的固定的等效焦距,从而实现变焦,因此摄像模组能够实现有级光学变焦,以根据用户不同的需要输出不同的图像的分辨率及画质。
一些实施例中,反光件能够在多个停留位上停留,多个停留位与多个镜头一一对应设置。驱动组件用于驱动反光件在多个停留位之间切换。此时,驱动组件对反光件的位置调节为有级调节。
在本实施例中,由于驱动组件能够驱动反光件在不同的停留位之间切换,不同的停留位对应于不同的镜头,反光件能够将对应镜头的汇聚光线反射至图像传感器,因此图像传感器可以通过反光件的位置变化,采集到多种图像。
另一些实施例中,驱动组件对反光件的调节也可以为无级调节。反光件除了能停留在前述多个停留位上,也可以停留在相邻的停留位之间。此时,邻近反光件目前停留位置的一个或多个停留位所对应的镜头汇聚的光线能够被反光件反射至图像传感器。在本实施例中,摄像模组的拍摄方式更为多样化,提高用户的拍摄体验。
一些实施例中,摄像模组还可以包括马达组件。马达组件安装于模组支架。图像传感器安装于马达组件。马达组件用于调整图像传感器的位置,以使摄像模组实现图像对焦,从而获取更清晰的目标图像。其中,马达组件对图像传感器的调整方向依据摄像模组的光路进行设计。
一些实施例中,多个镜头的入光方向一致,多个镜头的等效焦距不同,且多个镜头呈直线排布。驱动组件用于驱动反光件移动,且反光件的移动方向平行于多个镜头的排布方向。
在本实施例中,多个镜头呈直线排布的方式,使得摄像模组的外观更为简洁,也有利于简化驱动组件的结构,使得驱动组件驱动反光件移动时,反光件移动更为平稳,以提高摄像模组的可靠性。由于多个镜头的等效焦距不同,因此摄像模组能够通过改变反光件所在的停留位,切换图像传感器采集的光线所经过的镜头,镜头具有其对应的固定的等效焦距,从而实现变焦。
一些实施例中,驱动组件驱动反光件移动的方式有多种。例如:机械驱动方式,也即通过电机驱动,通过螺母丝杠传动、齿轮齿条传动或绳传动;电磁驱动方式,也即通过电磁铁与电磁铁或永磁铁之间的吸引作用和排斥作用实现运动;手动调节式,也即驱动组件中的部分结构露出于模组支架外部,由人手调节;手自一体调节式,也即集成自动调节模式和手动调节模式;智能材料变形调节式等。
一些实施例中,驱动组件包括电机、丝杠及螺母。螺母套设在丝杠外侧且螺纹连接丝杠。反光件固定连接螺母。电机用于驱动丝杠转动,以通过螺母带动反光件在多个停留位之间移动。
在本实施例中,驱动组件采用电机驱动、螺母和丝杠传动的方式使反光件在多个停留位之间移动,驱动组件的驱动方式平稳、可控性高,使得摄像模组的可靠性更高。
一些实施例中,多个镜头的入光方向一致,多个镜头的等效焦距不同。多个镜头呈三角排布、阵列排布或环形排布。驱动组件用于驱动反光件移动和转动。
在本实施例中,摄像模组的多个镜头的排布方式更为灵活和多样化,摄像模组的应用范围更广。由于多个镜头的等效焦距不同,因此摄像模组能够通过改变反光件所在的停留位,切换图像传感器采集的光线所经过的镜头,镜头具有其对应的固定的等效焦距,从而实现变焦。
一些实施例中,驱动组件包括第一驱动部分、第二驱动部分及第三驱动部分。第一驱动部分用于驱动反光件沿第一方向移动。第二驱动部分用于驱动反光件沿第二方向移动,第二方向垂直于第一方向。第三驱动部分用于驱动反光件绕第三方向转动,第三方向垂直于第一方向和第二方向,第三方向平行于多个镜头的入光方向。
在本实施例中,通过第一驱动部分、第二驱动部分以及第三驱动部分的配合,反光件能够在与多个镜头相对应的多个停留位之间移动,且将通过镜头的光线反射至图像传感器,使得摄像模组实现变焦。
一些实施例中,多个镜头的入光方向不同,多个镜头环绕地排布于反光件的周边。驱动组件用于驱动反光件转动,或者,驱动组件用于驱动反光件转动和移动。
在本实施例中,由于镜头组的多个镜头的入光方向不同,反光件能够转动(或者,转动和移动)以反射不同镜头汇聚的光线,因此摄像模组能够实现多方位拍摄,摄像模组的功能更为多样化。
一些实施例中,入光方向不同的镜头的数量多于两个,使得镜头组具有三个以上的入光方向,摄像模组的拍摄视角更多,视角死角更少,有利于实现全景拍摄和3D拍摄。
在本实施例中,多个镜头、图像传感器、反光件、驱动组件等位于摄像模组的模组支架内侧。模组支架可以从外部将摄像模组其他部件完全密封在其内侧,镜头组无需移动,而是通过位于模组支架内侧的反光件的转动实现变焦,极大地提高了摄像模组的密封性,摄像模组的使用寿命较长、可靠性较高,可以适用于需要防水、防尘、高压等极端条件的环境中。
一些实施例中,入光方向不同的多个镜头的等效焦距不同。此时,摄像模组既能够多方位拍摄,也能够实现实现变焦拍摄,使得摄像模组的功能更为多样化。另一些实施例中,入光方向不同的多个镜头的等效焦距也可以相同。再一些实施例中,入光方向不同的多个镜头中部分镜头的等效焦距相同,部分镜头的等效焦距不同。
一些实施例中,多个镜头包括第一镜头和第二镜头。第一镜头与第二镜头背对背排布且入光方向相反。反光件的转轴方向垂直于第一镜头与第二镜头的连线方向。
在本实施例中,由于第一镜头与第二镜头的入光方向相反,因此摄像模组能够采集相反两个方向的图像,拍摄方位广。当摄像模组应用于电子设备中时,第一镜头和第二镜头中的一者能够采集位于电子设备前方(电子设备的显示屏朝向电子设备的前方出光)的图像,另一者能够采集位于电子设备后方的图像,使得电子设备得以实现前置拍摄和后置拍摄,拍摄体验佳且成本低。
一些实施例中,镜头组包括至少两组入光方向不同的子镜头组。各子镜头组均包括多个入光方向一致且等效焦距不同的镜头。反光件位于两组子镜头组之间。驱动组件用于驱动反光件移动和转动。
在本实施例中,由于子镜头组包括多个入光方向一致且等效焦距不同的镜头,因此摄像模组能够在3D拍摄的过程中,增加焦距的变化,在获得不同视角的拍摄的同时,也配合长焦镜头对于远处物体的捕捉动作,使得远处物体的拍摄图像能够具备更加精细的3D变化。
一些实施例中,同一子镜头组中的多个镜头呈直线排布、三角排布、阵列排布或环形排布。此时,摄像模组的镜头排布方式和内部部件排布方式更为灵活和多样化。
一些实施例中,图像传感器的感光面垂直于镜头组的各个镜头的等效中心面。其中,镜头的等效中心面为经过镜头的等效光心的直径所在面。
在本实施例中,各个镜头汇聚的光线被反光件反射后,发生90°偏转后进入图像传感器,光线在传播过程中能够充分利用摄像模组的相垂直的两个方向上的空间,也即镜头的主光轴 所在方向和图像传感器的感光面的垂直方向上的空间,使得摄像模组中各部件的排布位置较为优化。
一些实施例中,反光件包括用于反射光线的反光层。反光层与对应于反光件的镜头的主光轴之间的夹角为45°。此时,经过镜头的光线被反光层反射后发生90°偏转,从而顺利进入图像传感器。
一些实施例中,镜头组包括基准镜头。反光层的宽度为经过反光层中心点的径向尺寸。反光层在不同的径向方向上,可以具有多个宽度。反光层的最小宽度A满足:
其中,B为基准镜头的半径,C为基准镜头的等效焦距,E为基准镜头的等效中心面与反光层之间的最小距离。
在本实施例中,当反光层的所有宽度都大于最小宽度A时,反光层能够完全反射经基准镜头汇聚的光线。也即,通过对反光层的最小宽度的限定,使得光线被基准镜头汇聚后,能够全部射入反光层,从而被反射向图像传感器,以使摄像模组能够采集到足够光线,从而具有较佳的拍摄质量。
一些实施例中,基准镜头为镜头组中的其中一个镜头,基准镜头的选择可以有多种方式,例如:
示例性的,基准镜头可以为镜头组中等效焦距最大的镜头。例如,基准镜头为镜头组中的长焦镜头或超长焦镜头。此时,反光层具有足够大的面积,能够将镜头组中的各个镜头汇聚的光线都全部反射至图像传感器,使得摄像模组在各种拍摄模式下均能够采集足够的光线,以具备较佳的拍摄质量。
示例性的,基准镜头也可以为镜头组中的标准镜头。此时,等效焦距小于或等于标准镜头的镜头(例如广角镜头)汇聚的光线能够全部被反光层反射至图像传感器,使得摄像模组在对应的拍摄模式下具有较佳的拍摄质量。而对于等效焦距大于标准镜头的镜头(例如长焦镜头),反光层也能够可以将被镜头汇聚的大部分光线反射至图像传感器,使得摄像模组在对应的拍摄模式下具有良好的拍摄质量。由于本实施例中反光层的尺寸依据标准镜头进行设计,因此反光层的尺寸相较于前述示例的反光层的尺寸较小,有利于摄像模组的小型化。
一些实施例中,反光件位于停留位时,反光层的中心位于对应于反光件的镜头的主光轴上,或者,反光层的中心也可以稍微偏离对应于反光件的镜头的主光轴。例如,反光层可以向远离图像传感器的方向偏离对应于反光件的镜头的主光轴,以更好地将镜头汇聚的光线反射向图像传感器
一些实施例中,反光件还包括基底。反光层形成于基底朝向对应于反光件的镜头的一侧表面。此时,反光层朝向镜头设置且相对镜头的等效中心面倾斜。
在本实施例中,由于反光层形成于基底朝向对应于反光件的镜头的一侧表面,因此光线无需进入基底即被反光层反射,光线损耗小,有利于保证摄像模组的拍摄质量。
另一些实施例中,反光件还包括基底。基底采用透光材料。基底包括第一侧表面、第二侧表面以及第三侧表面。第一侧表面朝向对应于反光件的镜头。第二侧表面朝向图像传感器。反光层形成于第三侧表面,用于将自第一侧表面进入基底的光线反射向第二侧表面。
在本实施例中,经镜头汇聚后的光线从第一侧表面进入基底,被反光层反射后,由第二侧表面射出基底后射向图像传感器,故而,虽然光线进入基底后发生稍许损耗,但是光线的 传播路径增加了,使得摄像模组能够设置焦距更大的镜头,从而实现长焦拍摄、甚至超长焦拍摄。
再一些实施例中,反光件还包括基底。基底采用透光材料。反光层嵌设于基底内部。反光件可采用模内注塑成型方式制成。
在本实施例中,反光件增加了光线在摄像模组内传输的路径长度,有利于摄像模组实现长焦拍摄或超长焦拍摄。同时,反光层设于基底的内部,基底保护反光层,避免反光层在反光件的制作或组装过程中受到磨损,从而保证摄像模组的可靠性。
示例性的,反光层可以是通过在基底一侧表面涂覆材料形成的膜层,也可以是将已成型的膜层固定于基底一侧表面所形成,也可以是通过对基底一侧表面进行研磨等加工工序而形成。
一些实施例中,图像传感器的感光面平行于镜头组的各个镜头的等效中心面。其中,镜头的等效中心面为经过镜头的等效光心的直径所在面。摄像模组还包括反射件,反射件用于将反光件反射出的光线反射至图像传感器。一种示例中,反光件的反光层与镜头的主光轴之间形成45°夹角,反射件的反射层垂直于反光件的反光层。反光件的反光层用于反射光线。反射件的反射层用于反射光线。
在本实施例中,经过镜头的光线依次被反光件和反射件反射后,发生180°偏转后进入图像传感器。本实施例相较于前述实施例,通过增加反射部件(包括反光件和反射件)的数量,使得光线发生多次偏转,不仅使得图像传感器的排布位置更为灵活,有利于提高摄像模组的器件排布灵活度,也使得光线的传播路径较长,摄像模组能够设置焦距更大的镜头,从而实现长焦拍摄或超长焦拍摄。
在其他一些实施例中,反光件或反射件等反射部件的数量也可以是两个或三个以上,本申请对此不作严格限定。反光件或反射件等反射部件的位置与镜头的等效中心面之间的位置也可以有其他关系,本申请对此不作严格限定。由于反射部件的数量及位置是配合图像传感器的感光面位置进行设置的,因此可以通过调整反射部件的数量及位置,使得图像传感器的感光面位置发生变化,也即图像传感器的感光面与镜头组的镜头的等效中心面之间的位置关系发生变化,进而使摄像模组能够实现更多样的结构方案和形态,适用范围更广。
一些实施例中,摄像模组还包括固定架和防抖组件。固定架固定连接驱动组件。防抖组件连接固定架与反光件,用于使反光件能够相对固定架转动。
在本实施例中,摄像模组设有用于驱动反光件转动的防抖组件,以通过反光件的转动补偿实现光学防抖,从而避免在拍摄过程中,因人手的抖动导致光线无法对焦的问题,使得摄像模组拍摄的图像清晰,用户使用体验较佳。
其中,防抖组件可以通过多种驱动方式实现,例如多点电磁驱动反光件转动、机械驱动(齿轮传动、连杆传动)反光件转动、智能材料形变驱动反光件转动等。
一些实施例中,固定架包括第一臂部和第二臂部。第一臂部与第二臂部之间形成夹角。反光件呈三棱柱体。反光件包括第一侧棱以及连接第一侧棱的第一表面和第二表面。第一表面朝向第一臂部,第二表面朝向第二臂部。防抖组件包括球形铰链和两组磁吸件。球形铰链连接在第一侧棱与固定架之间。两组磁吸件分别连接在第一表面与第一臂部之间以及第二表面与第二臂部之间。
在本实施例中,通过控制两组磁吸件的充放电动作和充电电流大小,可以控制反光件实现三个方向自由度的转动,反光件分别可以绕摄像模组的宽度方向、摄像模组的长度方向以及摄像模组的厚度方向转动,在加上驱动组件能够驱动反光件沿摄像模组的宽度方向移动, 因此摄像模组的反光件能够实现四个自由度的防抖,摄像模组的拍摄质量更佳。
第二方面,本申请实施例还提供一种电子设备。电子设备包括壳体及上述任一项的摄像模组。摄像模组安装于壳体。电子设备具有拍摄、摄像等功能。在本实施例中,摄像模组的成本较低,能够有效降低电子设备的整机成本。
应当理解的是,本申请中对技术特征、技术方案、有益效果或类似语言的描述并不是暗示在任意的单个实施例中可以实现所有的特点和优点。相反,可以理解的是对于特征或有益效果的描述意味着在一个或多个实施例中包括特定的技术特征、技术方案或有益效果。因此,本说明书中对于技术特征、技术方案或有益效果的描述并不一定是指相同的实施例。进而,还可以任何适当的方式组合本实施例中所描述的技术特征、技术方案和有益效果。本领域技术人员将会理解,无需特定实施例的一个或多个特定的技术特征、技术方案或有益效果即可实现实施例。在其他一些实施例中,还可在没有体现所有实施例的特定实施例中识别出额外的技术特征和有益效果。
图1是本申请一实施例提供的电子设备的侧视图;
图2是图1所示电子设备的后视图;
图3是图2所示电子设备的摄像模组在一些实施例中的部分结构示意图;
图4A是图1所示电子设备在一种拍摄模式下的用户界面示意图;
图4B是图1所示电子设备在另一种拍摄模式下的用户界面示意图;
图4C是图1所示电子设备在再一种拍摄模式下的用户界面示意图;
图5是图1所示电子设备切换拍摄模式时的一种可能的用户界面示意图;
图6A是图3所示摄像模组的反光件在一种实现方式中的结构示意图;
图6B是图3所示摄像模组的反光件在另一种实现方式中的结构示意图;
图6C是图3所示摄像模组的反光件在再一种实现方式中的结构示意图;
图7是图3所示摄像模组的反光件的反光层与对应于反光件的镜头的位置关系的示意图;
图8是图3所示摄像模组在一种示例中的结构示意图;
图9是图3所示摄像模组在另一种示例中的结构示意图;
图10是图3所示摄像模组在再一种示例中的结构示意图;
图11是图3所示摄像模组在再一种示例中的结构示意图;
图12是图3所示摄像模组在再一种示例中的结构示意图;
图13是图3所示摄像模组在再一种示例中的结构示意图;
图14是图3所示摄像模组在再一种示例中的结构示意图;
图15是图3所示摄像模组在再一种示例中的结构示意图;
图16是图3所示摄像模组在再一种示例中的结构示意图;
图17是图2所示电子设备的摄像模组在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图;
图18是图17所示摄像模组在另一角度的结构示意图;
图19是图2所示电子设备的摄像模组在再一些实施例中的部分结构示意图;
图20是图19所示摄像模组在另一角度的结构示意图;
图21是图19所示摄像模组的球形铰链的结构示意图;
图22是图2所示电子设备的摄像模组在再一些实施例中的部分结构示意图;
图23是本申请另一实施例提供的电子设备的后视图;
图24是图23所示电子设备的摄像模组在一些实施例中的部分结构示意图;
图25是图24所示摄像模组的内部结构示意图;
图26是图23所示电子设备的摄像模组在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图;
图27是图26所示摄像模组的内部结构示意图;
图28是图23所示电子设备的摄像模组在再一些实施例中的部分结构示意图;
图29是图28所示摄像模组的内部结构示意图;
图30是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备的后视图;
图31是图30所示电子设备的摄像模组在一些实施例中的部分结构示意图;
图32是图31所示摄像模组的内部结构示意图;
图33是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备的正视图;
图34是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备的正视图;
图35是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备的侧视图;
图36是图35所示电子设备的摄像模组的内部结构示意图;
图37是图36所示结构在另一角度的结构示意图;
图38是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备的侧视图;
图39是图38所示电子设备的摄像模组的内部结构示意图;
图40是图39所示结构在另一角度的结构示意图;
图41是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备的正视图;
图42是图41所示电子设备的摄像模组在多种实施例中的结构示意图;
图43是图41所示电子设备的摄像模组在另一些实施例中的结构示意图;
图44是图43所示摄像模组的内部结构示意图。
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请以下各个实施例进行描述。
本申请实施例提供一种电子设备,该电子设备具有拍摄或摄像功能。例如,电子设备可以是手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、相机、可穿戴设备、电子眼、摄像机等。其中,上述可穿戴设备可以是智能手环、智能手表、智能头显、智能眼镜等。
请参阅图1和图2,图1是本申请一实施例提供的电子设备100的侧视图;图2是图1所示电子设备100的后视图。在本实施例中,以电子设备是手机为例进行说明。
电子设备100包括摄像模组10、壳体20、显示屏30、电路板40、处理器50及存储器60。显示屏30安装于壳体20。壳体20可以包括边框和后盖。显示屏30和后盖分别安装于边框的相背两侧。显示屏30用于显示图像。摄像模组10安装于壳体20。摄像模组10用于采集图像。电路板40收容于壳体20内部。处理器50及存储器60固定于电路板40。显示屏30、摄像模组10及存储器60耦合处理器50。存储器60用于存储计算机程序代码。计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。处理器50用于调用计算机指令以使电子设备100执行相应的操作,例如,使显示屏30显示目标图像,使摄像模组10采集目标图像等。
其中,为方便后文对摄像模组10的描述,定义摄像模组10的宽度方向为图示X方向,摄像模组10的长度方向为图示方向Y,摄像模组10的厚度方向为图示方向Z。本实施例中,以“摄像模组10的宽度方向X平行于电子设备100的宽度方向,摄像模组10的长度方向Y平行于电子设备100的长度方向,摄像模组10的厚度方向Z平行于电子设备100的厚度方向”为例进行说明。
在一些实施例中,显示屏30可以为有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED)显示屏,有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light-emitting diode,AMOLED)显示屏,迷你发光二极管(mini organic light-emitting diode)显示屏,微型发光二极管(micro organic light-emitting diode)显示屏,微型有机发光二极管(micro organic light-emitting diode)显示屏,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)显示屏,或者,液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD)等。
在一些实施例中,如图1所示,电子设备100的前方位于电子设备100的一侧,电子设备100的后方位于电子设备100的另一侧,显示屏30朝向电子设备100的前方出光。摄像模组10能够采集位于电子设备100后方的图像。例如,于电子设备100的后盖上开设摄像孔,摄像模组10通过摄像孔进行拍摄。
在其他一些实施例中,摄像模组10也可以采集电子设备100前方的图像。例如,摄像模组10通过显示屏30的非显示区进行拍摄。显示屏30可以为异形屏。例如,显示屏30的顶部形成梯形或水滴形的非显示区域。显示屏30也可以为较为规整的矩形屏幕,此时,显示屏30的顶部空间或底部空间形成非显示区。或者,显示屏30中设有透光孔或透光部分,摄像模组10位于显示屏30下方,摄像模组10通过透光孔或透光部分进行拍摄。
在一些实施例中,如图2所示,电路板40可以设有镂空的避让区域,摄像模组10可设于该避让区域。这样,摄像模组10和电路板40的组装结构在电子设备100的厚度方向(也即摄像模组10的厚度方向Z)上的整体尺寸较小,有利于电子设备100的轻薄化。摄像模组10包括柔性电路板1,柔性电路板1的一端设有电连接器。柔性电路板1的电连接器连接至电路板40上的电连接器,使得摄像模组10与电路板40上的电路及器件相耦合。示例性的,软性电路板1的电连接器可以是板对板(board to board,BTB)连接器。柔性电路板1与电路板40之间传输的电信号可以包括摄像功能信号、驱动组件控制信号等。其他一些实施例中,摄像模组10与电路板40上的电路及器件也可以通过无线连接的方式实现耦合。
请参阅图3,图3是图2所示电子设备100的摄像模组10在一些实施例中的部分结构示意图。图3的示图所在平面对应于图2所示电子设备100的A-A线位置。
摄像模组10可以包括模组支架2、镜头组3、图像传感器4、反光件5以及驱动组件6。图像传感器4也可以称为感光元件。模组支架2用于固定和保护摄像模组10的其他部件。镜头组3、图像传感器4、反光件5及驱动组件6安装于模组支架2。模组支架2安装于电子设备100的壳体。
镜头组3可以包括等效焦距不同的多个镜头。“多个”为至少两个,也即两个以上。例如,镜头组3的镜头的数量可以是两个、三个、四个或者更多个。示例性地,如图3所示,以镜头组3包括三个镜头(31a、31b、31c)为例对本申请一些实施例进行详细说明。一些实施例中,如图3所示,镜头组3的多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)可以排列于摄像模组10的宽度方向X。在其他一些实施例中,镜头组3的多个镜头也可以排列于摄像模组10的长度方向Y或其他方向。
图3所示实施例中,位于右侧的镜头31c的等效焦距大于位于中间的镜头31b的等效焦距,位于中间的镜头31b的等效焦距大于位于左侧的镜头31a的等效焦距。也就是说,越靠近图像传感器4的镜头的等效焦距越小,越远离图像传感器4的镜头的等效焦距越大。此时,各镜头汇聚光线能够在图像传感器4上形成较为清楚的图像,以使摄像模组10所拍摄图像的质量较佳。可以理解的是,在本申请实施例中,“左”、“中”、“右”等仅是参考附图的方位, 使用的方位用语是为了说明及理解本申请,而不是指示或暗指所指的装置或元件必须具有特定的方位、以特定的方位构造和操作,因此不能理解为对本申请实施例的限制。
示例性的,镜头组3的三个镜头可以包括广角镜头、标准镜头以及长焦镜头。例如,图3中,镜头31b可以为标准镜头,镜头31c为长焦镜头,镜头31a为广角镜头。在其他一些实施例中,镜头组3也可以包括五个镜头,五个镜头可以分别为超广角镜头、广角镜头、标准镜头、长焦镜头以及超长焦镜头。其他一些实施例中,镜头组3的镜头的数量及类型也可以有不同的组合方式,本申请对此不作严格限定。
标准镜头可以为电子设备100的主镜头。本实施例中,通过等效焦距来区分多个镜头。示例性的,超广角镜头的等效焦距可以在13毫米至20毫米范围内。广角镜头的等效焦距可以在24毫米至38毫米范围内。标准镜头的等效焦距可以在40毫米至55毫米范围内。长焦镜头的等效焦距可以在85毫米至300毫米范围内。超长焦镜头的等效焦距可以大于300毫米。超广角镜头的视场角可以在94度至118度范围内。广角镜头的视场角可以在60度至84度范围内。标准镜头的视场角为50度左右。
一些实施例中,反光件5用于将多个镜头中的其中一个镜头汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器4。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5活动。例如,驱动组件6可以用于驱动反光件5在多个停留位之间切换。多个停留位与多个镜头一一对应。停留位的数量与镜头的数量相等,每一个停留位对应于一个镜头。反光件5用于将对应的镜头汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器4。对应的镜头是指对应于反光件5所在停留位的镜头。
如图3所示,摄像模组10具有三个停留位(61a、61b、61c),三个停留位(61a、61b、61c)与三个镜头(31a、31b、31c)一一对应设置。当反光件5位于某个停留位时,反光件5能够将与该停留位对应的镜头汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器4。例如,当反光件5位于停留位61b时,停留位61b对应于镜头31b,反光件5将镜头31b汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器4,图像传感器4得以借助于反光件5采集通过镜头31b的图像。当反光件5位于停留位61a时,停留位61a对应于镜头31a,反光件5将镜头31a汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器4,图像传感器4得以借助于反光件5采集通过镜头31a的图像。当反光件5位于停留位61c时,停留位61c对应于镜头31c,反光件5将镜头31c汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器4,图像传感器4得以借助于反光件5采集通过镜头31c的图像。
在一些实施例中,上述三个停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间的距离可以是相同。三个镜头(31a、31b、31c)之间的距离也是相同的。这样,摄像模组10的外观一致性较佳。在另一些实施例中,上述三个停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间的距离也可以是不同的,以使三个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方式更为灵活,镜头组3的多个镜头的等效焦距的设计方案能够更为多样化。
在上述实施例中,由于驱动组件6能够驱动反光件5在不同的停留位之间切换,不同的停留位对应于等效焦距不同的镜头,反光件5能够将对应镜头汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器4,因此图像传感器4可以通过反光件5的位置变化,采集到多种焦距不同的图像。也即,摄像模组10将等效焦距不同的多个镜头集成到一个模组中,通过反光件5的位置变化,共用一个图像传感器4,以同时具备多种焦距需求不同的拍摄功能,相较于传统的设置多个摄像模组的方案,本实施例的摄像模组10的成本大幅度降低,也节省了电子设备内部的空间。
另外,摄像模组10通过改变反光件5所在的停留位,切换图像传感器4所采集光线所经过的镜头,从而实现变焦,因此摄像模组10能够实现有级光学变焦,以根据用户不同的需要输出不同的图像的分辨率及画质。其中,由于摄像模组10通过改变反光件5的位置来传递等 效焦距不同的镜头汇聚的光线,因此避免了精密度要求较高的镜头组3中镜头的位移,镜头固定于模组支架2,为摄像模组10中固定不动的部件,从而保证了摄像模组10的可靠性。
由于反光件5位于镜头组3与图像传感器4之间,相较于光线由镜头组直接进入图像传感器的光路路径,光线由镜头组3射向反光件5、而后反光件5将光线反射至图像传感器4的光路路径的长度更长,也即反光件5的设置增长了光线路径,使得摄像模组10能够采用等效焦距更长的镜头,以获得长焦拍摄功能、甚至超长焦拍摄功能。
在一些实施例中,摄像模组10的多个停留位可以包括初始停留位。该初始停留位可以是指在摄像模组10启动时或停止工作(例如图像传感器4处于休眠或下电)时,反光件5所停留的位置。也就是说,摄像模组10启动时,反光件5停留在初始停留位,或者由其他停留位切换至初始停留位,图像传感器4采集由对应于初始停留位的镜头汇聚的光线;摄像模组10停止工作时,反光件5位于初始停留位,或者由其他停留位切换至初始停留位并保持停留。
一些实施例中,为了方便用户进行拍摄操作,上述初始停留位可以是用户在一时间段内使用频率最高的停留位,这样用户就可以快速地按照自己喜欢的方式进行拍照。在这种情况下,上述初始停留位可以是动态变化的。参阅图3,例如,在某个时间段中,停留位61b是使用频率最高的停留位,则停留位61b为初始停留位。在另一个时间段中,停留位61c是使用频率最高的停留位,则停留位61c为初始停留位。
请一并参阅图3至图4C,图4A是图1所示电子设备100在一种拍摄模式下的用户界面示意图,图4B是图1所示电子设备100在另一种拍摄模式下的用户界面示意图,图4C是图1所示电子设备100在再一种拍摄模式下的用户界面示意图。以下结合电子设备100的用户界面对摄像模组10的几种可能的拍摄模式进行举例说明:
请结合参阅图3和图4A,图4A对应于默认拍摄模式。电子设备100接收到用户启动拍摄的操作(例如打开拍照应用)后,启动摄像模组10。其中,启动拍摄操作可以是用户界面中的拍摄图标被触发的操作,也可以是电子设备100的机械按键被预设动作触发的操作,也可以是电子设备100被预设语音触发的操作。摄像模组10启动时,反光件5可以位于初始停留位(例如图3中停留位61b),也可以从其他停留位快速切换至初始停留位;在本实施例中,当反光件5所在的位置是初始停留位时,摄像模组10处于常规拍摄模式。此时,电子设备100的用户界面显示如图4A所示图像。
示例性地,图4A所示的用户界面包括预览框401、设置栏402(包括对闪光灯、HDR等拍摄参数的设置)、拍摄模式栏403、变焦倍率标识404、拍摄快门键405、回显控件406和用于切换前置摄像头和后置摄像头的控件407等。其中,拍摄快门键405用于接收用户的操作(例如点击、轻触、按压等),电子设备100响应于该操作,将预览框401中示意的图像保存为图片。控件407用于接收用户的操作,电子设备100响应于该操作,将摄像模组10的反光件5由目前的停留位切换至入光方向不同的另一个停留位(可参阅后文图36实施例中停留位61d和61f),或者将目前的摄像模组切换为入光方向不同的另一个摄像模组。
在本申请实施例中,摄像模组10启动后,若电子设备100确认拍摄操作,则摄像模组10的图像传感器4捕捉目标场景图像。拍摄操作可以是用户界面中的拍摄图标被触发的操作,也可以是电子设备100的机械按键被预设动作触发的操作,也可以是电子设备100被预设语音触发的操作。
可以理解的是,不同停留位对应于不同的变焦倍率范围。若电子设备100确认目标变焦倍率,则摄像模组10的反光件5可以从初始停留位或者其他停留位切换至对应于目标变焦倍率所属变焦倍率范围的停留位,以实现变焦。
示例性的,结合参阅图3,停留位61a对应的变焦倍率范围小于1,反光件5位于停留位61a时,摄像模组10处于广角拍摄模式;停留位61b对应的变焦倍率范围为大于或等于1且小于1.5,反光件5位于停留位61b时,摄像模组10处于默认拍摄模式;停留位61c对应的变焦倍率范围大于或等于1.5,反光件5位于停留位61c时,摄像模组10处于长焦拍摄模式。
请结合参阅图3和图4A,电子设备100确认目标变焦倍率为1,目标变焦倍率为1所属变焦倍率范围(大于或等于1且小于1.5)对应于停留位61b,反光件5位于停留位61b。
请结合参阅图3和图4B,图4B对应于长焦拍摄模式。其中,电子设备100确认目标变焦倍率为1.5,目标变焦倍率为1.5所属变焦倍率范围(大于或等于1.5)对应于停留位61c,反光件5可以从初始停留位或者其他停留位移动停留位61c,摄像模组10处于长焦拍摄模式。此时,电子设备100的用户界面显示如图4B所示图像。
请结合参阅图3和图4C,图4C对应于广角拍摄模式。其中,电子设备100确认目标变焦倍率为0.8,目标变焦倍率为0.8所属变焦倍率范围(小于或等于1)对应于停留位61a,反光件5可以从初始停留位或者其他停留位移动至停留位61a,摄像模组10处于广角拍摄模式。此时,电子设备100的用户界面显示如图4C所示图像。
应当理解的是,当反光件5在停留位之间切换时,电子设备100的预览框内图像会有短暂的切换时间间隙。一些实施例中,电子设备100的预览框内图像可以采用过渡图像来填补这间隙,在反光件5切换完成后,预览框内显示当前镜头所采集的图像。过渡图像可以是黑屏,或者是上一图像定格后的虚化影像。如图5所示,图5是图1所示电子设备100切换拍摄模式时的一种可能的用户界面示意图。图5中示意出反光件5自初始停留位切换至目标停留位时,电子设备100采用上一图像定格后的虚化影像作为过渡图像。在一些实施例中,该过渡图像可以具有从图4C到图5逐渐虚化的动画效果,这样可以提高用户的拍摄体验。另一些实施例中,当反光件5在停留位之间切换时,电子设备100的预览框内也可以显示图像传感器4实时捕捉的图像。该图像为动态图像,用户通过该动态图像能够清晰地感知摄像模组10的变焦过程,从而能够提高用户的拍摄体验。
一些实施例中,由于摄像模组10的反光件5在停留位之间切换时,摄像模组10实现的是有级光学变焦,电子设备100还可以通过处理器对图像传感器4所采集的图像进行处理,在摄像模组10的有级光学变焦上结合数码变焦,实现图像显示上的无级变焦。
请参阅图3,由于反光件5能够改变光路方向,因此镜头组3与图像传感器4的相对位置能够灵活设计,故而摄像模组10能够进一步通过设计镜头组3中镜头(31a、31b、31c)的位置和图像传感器4的位置,减小摄像模组10的体积,进而可以减小电子设备100的体积。例如,相较于传统的潜望式镜头模组,本实施例的摄像模组10的镜头组3中的镜头(31a、31b、31c)平铺设计,镜头(31a、31b、31c)的直径大小也不会影响到摄像模组10的厚度尺寸(如图3中的Z方向),有利于摄像模组10薄型化。
再者,由于摄像模组10的体积能够得到合理控制,因此摄像模组10可以在不大幅度增加体积的情况下,采用较大口径的镜头,以获取更多的采光量,使得摄像模组10的拍摄质量更高,也便于夜间拍摄或灰暗环境中拍摄。
一些实施例中,在一个镜头中,可以包括一个镜片或者多个镜片的组合。镜头包括多个镜片时,多个镜片包括凸透镜,还可以包括凹透镜。图3所示实施例中,以镜头31b包括一个镜片311为例进行说明。
示例性的,镜头组3中各镜头(31a、31b、31c)的结构大致相同,主要区别在于等效焦距不同的镜头的镜片尺寸或者镜片材质可以不同。
示例性的,镜头组3中的多个镜头的直径可以是相同的,也可以是不同的。图3实施例以镜头组3中的多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的直径相同为例进行说明。
一些实施例中,镜头组3中的各镜头均具有等效中心面。镜头的等效中心面为经过镜头的等效光心的直径所在面。镜头的等效中心面垂直于镜头的主光轴。当镜头包括一个镜片时,镜头的等效光心为该镜片的光心。当镜头包括多个镜片时,镜头的等效光心为多个镜片所形成的镜片组的光心。
例如,如图3所示,镜头31b具有等效中心面313,镜头31b具有主光轴314,等效中心面313垂直于主光轴314。镜头31b包括一个镜片311,镜头31b的等效光心为镜片311的光心。本实施例中,以“镜头组3的入光方向一致的镜头的等效中心面平齐”为例进行说明。其他一些实施例中,镜头组3的入光方向一致的镜头的等效中心面也可以不平齐。
在一些实施例中,如图3所示,镜头组3的多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)可以各自具有独立的镜筒,多个镜头通过其镜筒分别安装于模组支架2。例如,镜头31b包括镜筒312。在其他一些实施例中,镜头组3的多个镜头可以共用一个镜筒架,各镜头的镜片或镜片组安装于镜头架,镜筒架固定于模组支架2。在本实施例中,摄像模组10能够通过模组支架2同时固定多个镜头,相较于传统方案的将多个独立的摄像头模组(各自具有模组支架)紧凑排布在一起而形成的摄像模组,本实施例摄像模组10的整体体积更小,所需安装空间更小,能够更灵活地安装于电子设备100中。
一些实施例中,如图3所示,模组支架2可以包括支架底座21和镜头固定架22,镜头固定架22固定于支架底座21。多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)安装于镜头固定架22。其中,镜头固定架22可拆卸地安装于支架底座21,使得摄像模组10可在后续维护中,通过拆卸镜头固定架22取下镜头组3,维护方便、成本低。其他实施例中,镜头固定架22也可以不可拆卸地安装于支架底座21,以保证摄像模组10的结构强度和牢固度。
一些实施例中,如图3所示,摄像模组10还可以包括透光的保护盖板7。保护盖板7的结构强度较高。保护盖板7安装于模组支架2且覆盖多个镜头(31a、31b、31c),以保护多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的镜片或镜片组。此时,镜头组3的镜头(31a、31b、31c)靠近保护盖板7放置,而相对远离反光件5设置,以缩短镜头(31a、31b、31c)与保护盖板7之间的光路路径,增加镜头(31a、31b、31c)与反光件5之间的光路路径,使得摄像模组10能够采用等效焦距更长的镜头,以获得长焦拍摄功能、甚至超长焦拍摄功能。另外,由于镜头组3靠近保护盖板7放置,虽然保护盖板7没有视场角,但镜头组3的镜头(31a、31b、31c)具有视场角,因此摄像模组10能够获得较大的采光量,从而具有较高的拍摄质量。可以理解的,当镜头组3与保护盖板7之间的距离较远时,外部光线容易被位于镜头组3与保护盖板7之间的结构遮挡,导致摄像模组10的采光量不足,因此在设计时,可以使镜头组3尽量靠近保护盖板7。其中,保护盖板7可以采用玻璃材料,或高透的塑料材料。
在其他一些实施例中,镜头组3的各镜头均可以具有独立的保护盖板,各镜头的保护盖板固定于其镜筒,以保护其镜片。此时,镜头固定架22与底座支架21的顶部之间密封连接,镜头固定架22与镜头之间密封连接,镜头部分外露在模组支架2的外部。
一些实施例中,如图3所示,摄像模组10还可以包括马达组件8。马达组件8安装于模组支架2。图像传感器4安装于马达组件8。马达组件8用于调整图像传感器4的位置,以使摄像模组10实现图像对焦,从而获取更清晰的目标图像。其中,马达组件8对图像传感器4的调整方向依据摄像模组10的光路进行设计。例如,图3所示实施例中,马达组件8可驱动图像传感器4左右浮动,也即沿方向X移动。
可以理解的是,上述实施例中的反光件5的结构可以有多种实现方式。例如:
一种实现方式中,请参阅图6A,图6A是图3所示摄像模组10的反光件5在一种实现方式中的结构示意图。为了说明反光件5的结构和位置,图6A同时示意出了摄像模组10的镜头31b和图像传感器4。
反光件5包括用于反射光线的反光层51。反光件5还可以包括基底52。反光层51形成于基底52朝向对应于反光件5的镜头31b的一侧表面。此时,反光层51朝向镜头31b设置且相对镜头31b的等效中心面313倾斜。
基底52的形状可以有多种实现方式,例如三棱柱、长方体、平板或不规则形状等。反光层51的形状可以是圆形、方形、三角形或者不规则形状等。基底52的材料可以是透光的,也可以是不透光的。本实现方式中,以基底52呈三棱柱形为例进行说明。反光层51形成于基底52的侧表面上。反光层51呈方形。
反光层51可以是通过在基底52一侧表面涂覆材料形成的膜层,也可以是将已成型的膜层固定于基底52一侧表面所形成,也可以是通过对基底52一侧表面进行研磨等加工工序而形成。本申请实施例对反光层51的构成及形成方式不作严格限定。
在上述实现方式中,由于反光层51形成于基底52朝向对应于反光件5的镜头31b的一侧表面,因此光线无需进入基底52即被反光层51反射,光线损耗小,有利于保证摄像模组10的拍摄质量。
另一种实现方式中,请参阅图6B,图6B是图3所示摄像模组10的反光件5在另一种实现方式中的结构示意图。为了说明反光件5的结构和位置,图6B同时示意出了摄像模组10的镜头31b和图像传感器4。图6B中未示意光线射入和射出反光件5表面时发生的折射。以下主要描述本实现方式与前述实现方式的区别,本实现方式与前述实现方式相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
反光件5可以包括用于反射光线的反光层51。反光件5还可以包括基底52。基底52采用透光材料。基底52包括第一侧表面521、第二侧表面522以及第三侧表面523。第一侧表面521朝向对应于反光件5的镜头31b。第二侧表面522朝向图像传感器4。反光层51形成于第三侧表面523,用于将自第一侧表面521进入基底52的光线反射向第二侧表面522。示例性的,基底52为三棱柱。第一侧表面521的两侧分别连接第二侧表面522和第三侧表面523,第二侧表面522远离第一侧表面521的一侧和第三侧表面523远离第一侧表面521的一侧彼此连接。
在本实现方式中,经镜头31b汇聚后的光线从第一侧表面521进入基底52,被反光层51反射后,由第二侧表面522射出基底52后射向图像传感器4,故而,虽然光线进入基底52后发生稍许损耗,但是光线的传播路径增加了,使得摄像模组10能够设置焦距更大的镜头,从而实现长焦拍摄、甚至超长焦拍摄。
再一种实现方式中,请参阅图6C,图6C是图3所示摄像模组10的反光件5在再一种实现方式中的结构示意图。为了说明反光件5的结构和位置,图6C同时示意出了摄像模组10的镜头31b和图像传感器4。图6C中未示意光线射入和射出反光件5表面时发生的折射。以下主要描述本实现方式与前述实现方式的区别,本实现方式与前述实现方式相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
反光件5可以包括用于反射光线的反光层51。反光件5还可以包括基底52。基底52可以采用透光材料。反光层51嵌设于基底52内部。反光件5可采用模内注塑成型方式制成。
在本实现方式中,反光件5增加了光线在摄像模组10内传输的路径长度,有利于摄像模 组10实现长焦拍摄或超长焦拍摄。同时,反光层51设于基底52的内部,基底52保护反光层51,避免反光层51在反光件5的制作或组装过程中受到磨损,从而保证摄像模组10的可靠性。
可以理解的是,反光件5的结构以及反光件5与镜头组3的镜头之间的位置关系还可以有其他实现方式,本申请对此不作严格限定。
本申请一些实施例中,对反光层51的位置和尺寸进行了合理设计,以使反光件5能够反射足够的光线至图像传感器4,以保证摄像模组10的拍摄质量。
例如,请参阅图7,图7是图3所示摄像模组10的反光件5的反光层51与对应于反光件5的镜头31b的位置关系的示意图。其中,反光层51与对应于反光件5的镜头31b的主光轴314之间的夹角为45°。此时,经过镜头31b的光线被反光层51反射后发生90°偏转,从而顺利进入图像传感器4。
一种示例中,反光件5位于停留位61b(参阅图3)时,反光层51的中心位于对应于反光件5的镜头31b的主光轴314上。其他示例中,反光层51的中心也可以稍微偏离对应于反光件5的镜头31b的主光轴314。例如,反光层51可以向远离图像传感器4的方向偏离对应于反光件5的镜头31b的主光轴314,以更好地将镜头31b汇聚的光线反射向图像传感器4。
一些实施例中,镜头组3可以包括基准镜头。图7所示实施例中,示意的基准镜头为目前对应于反光件5的镜头31b。反光层51的宽度A’为经过反光层51中心点的径向尺寸。反光层51在不同的径向方向上,可以具有多个宽度A’。反光层51的最小宽度A满足:
其中,B为基准镜头的半径,C为基准镜头的等效焦距,E为基准镜头的等效中心面与反光层51之间的最小距离。图7所示实施例中,B为镜头31b的半径,C为镜头31b的等效焦距,E为镜头31b的等效中心面313与反光层51之间的最小距离。
在本实施例中,当反光层51的所有宽度A’都大于或等于最小宽度A时,反光层51就能够完全反射经基准镜头汇聚的光线。也即,通过对反光层51的最小宽度的限定,光线被基准镜头汇聚后,能够全部射入反光层51,从而被反射向图像传感器4,以使摄像模组10能够采集到足够光线,从而具有较佳的拍摄质量。
可以理解的是,反光层51的所有宽度A’都大于或等于最小宽度A,因此反光层51的最窄位置处的宽度也大于或等于最小宽度A。例如,反光层51呈长方形,反光层51的短边尺寸小于长边尺寸,则反光层51的短边尺寸大于或等于最小宽度A。或者,反光层51呈圆形,则反光层51的直径大于或等于最小宽度A。
上述实施例中,基准镜头可以为镜头组3中的其中一个镜头,基准镜头的选择可以有多种方式,例如:
一种示例中,基准镜头可以为镜头组3中等效焦距最大的镜头。例如,基准镜头可以为镜头组3中的长焦镜头或超长焦镜头。在此情况下,反光层51具有足够大的面积,能够将镜头组3中的各个镜头汇聚的光线都全部反射至图像传感器4,使得摄像模组10在各种拍摄模式下均能够采集足够的光线,以具备较佳的拍摄质量。
另一种示例中,基准镜头可以为镜头组3中的标准镜头。此时,等效焦距小于或等于标准镜头的镜头(例如广角镜头)汇聚的光线能够全部被反光层51反射至图像传感器4,使得摄像模组10在对应的拍摄模式下具有较佳的拍摄质量。而对于等效焦距大于标准镜头的镜头(例如长焦镜头),反光层51也能够可以将被镜头汇聚的大部分光线反射至图像传感器4,使得摄像模组10在对应的拍摄模式下具有良好的拍摄质量。由于本实施例中反光层51的尺 寸依据标准镜头进行设计,因此反光层51的尺寸相较于前述示例的反光层51的尺寸较小,有利于摄像模组10的小型化。
在本申请实施例中,驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5移动,以使反光件5在停留位之间切换,多个停留位与镜头组3的多个镜头一一对应设置,因此驱动组件6的设置方式依据多个镜头的排布方式进行设计。
在一些实施例中,请参阅图3,图3示意出镜头组3的多个镜头的一种示例性的排布方式:多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的入光方向一致,且多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)呈直线排布。镜头的入光方向即为外部光线进入镜头的方向。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5移动。反光件5的移动方向与多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排列方向相一致。
在本实施例中,多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)呈直线排布的方式,使得摄像模组10和电子设备100的外观更为简洁,也有利于简化驱动组件6的结构,使得驱动组件6驱动反光件5移动时,反光件5移动更为平稳,以提高摄像模组10的可靠性。
可以理解的是,驱动组件6驱动反光件5移动的方式可以有多种。例如:机械驱动方式,也即通过电机驱动,通过螺母丝杠传动、齿轮齿条传动或绳传动;电磁驱动方式,也即通过电磁铁与电磁铁或永磁铁之间的吸引作用和排斥作用实现运动;手动调节式,也即驱动组件6中的部分结构露出于模组支架外部,由人手调节;手自一体调节式,也即集成自动调节模式和手动调节模式;智能材料变形调节式等。
在一种示例中,请参阅图8,图8是图3所示摄像模组10在一种示例中的结构示意图。本示例中,驱动组件6的驱动方式为机械驱动方式。
在本示例中,驱动组件6可以包括电机621、丝杠622及螺母623。丝杠622的延伸方向平行于多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方向。本示例中,多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)可以排布于摄像模组10的宽度方向X。螺母623套设在丝杠622外侧且螺纹连接丝杠622。反光件5固定连接螺母623。本申请实施例中,两个部件固定连接,是指两个部件连接后,保持彼此固定的状态,这里并不限定两个部件之间的连接方式是可拆卸连接或者是不可拆卸连接,也不限定两个部分之间是直接连接或者是间接连接。电机621用于驱动丝杠622转动,以通过螺母623带动反光件5在多个停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间移动。电机621耦合电子设备100的处理器,电机621依据处理器发出的信号执行对应的操作,例如正转、反转、停止转动等。
在本示例中,驱动组件6采用电机621驱动、螺母623和丝杠622传动的方式使反光件5在停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间移动,驱动组件6的驱动方式平稳、可控性高,使得摄像模组10的可靠性更高。
一些实施例中,电机621可以为步进电机。此时,电机621的控制方式可以为闭环控制,能够提高对反光件5移动位置的控制精确度,使得驱动组件6的驱动动作更为可靠和精确,以保证摄像模组10的拍摄质量。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括减速器624。减速器624连接在电机621与丝杠622之间。减速器624能够降低电机621的输出转速,提高输出扭矩。例如,减速器624可以为齿轮箱。
在另一些实施例中,电机621可以固定连接于模组支架2。驱动组件6还可以包括轴承625。轴承625固定连接于模组支架2,且与电机621间隔设置。丝杠622的远离电机621的一端安装于轴承625。此时,轴承625能够减少丝杠622转动时的摩擦力,使得丝杠622的转动更为顺滑,以降低摄像模组10发生故障的几率。
一些实施例中,丝杠622可以具有右旋的外螺纹。电机621驱动丝杠622向右转动时,螺母623带动反光件5向右移动,以使摄像模组10实现变焦。电机621驱动丝杠622向左转动时,螺母623带动反光件5向左移动,以使摄像模组10实现变焦。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括传动件626。传动件626的一端连接螺母623。传动件626的另一端连接反光件5。也即,传动件626连接在反光件5与螺母623之间。一种实现方式中,传动件626与螺母623可以一体成型。其他实现方式中,传动件626与螺母623也可以通过组装形成一体式结构。可以理解的是,在其他实现方式中,驱动组件6也可以不包括传动件626,而是通过对反光件5的结构进行设计,使得反光件5具有传动部(相当于前述传动件626),驱动组件6能够通过对传动部的控制,使得反光件5在停留位之间移动。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括导向杆627。导向杆627固定连接于模组支架2。导向杆627的延伸方向平行于丝杠622的延伸方向。传动件626设有导向孔。导向杆627穿过导向孔。导向杆627用于引导传动件626的移动方向,使得传动件626能够更平稳地带动反光件5移动。导向杆627与传动件626之间的滑动连接关系也可以通过在导向杆627和传动件626的一者中设T形块、另一者中设T形槽,由T形块与T形槽相配合实现。导向杆627与传动件626之间的滑动连接关系还可以通过其他配合结构实现,本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
另一种示例中,请参阅图9,图9是图3所示摄像模组10在另一种示例中的结构示意图。本示例中,驱动组件6的驱动方式为机械驱动方式。
在本示例中,驱动组件6可以包括电机631、齿轮组632以及齿条633。电机631固定连接于模组支架2。齿轮组632包括输入齿轮和与输入齿轮联动的输出齿轮。一种实现方式中,输出齿轮啮合输入齿轮。另一种实现方式中,输出齿轮与输入齿轮之间连接有一个或多个连接齿轮。电机631连接输入齿轮,以驱动输入齿轮转动。输出齿轮与齿条633啮合。齿条633的延伸方向平行于多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方向。反光件5固定连接齿条633。电机631驱动输入齿轮转动时,输入齿轮带动齿条633移动,齿条633带动反光件5在多个停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间移动,以使摄像模组10实现变焦。电机631耦合电子设备100的处理器,电机631依据处理器发出的信号执行对应的操作,例如正转、反转、停止转动等。
一些实施例中,电机631可以为步进电机。此时,电机631的控制方式为闭环控制,能够提高对反光件5移动位置的控制精确度,使得驱动组件6的驱动动作更为可靠和精确,以保证摄像模组10的拍摄质量。
在另一些实施例中,输出齿轮的数量可以为一个或多个。当输出齿轮的数量为多个时,多个输出齿轮啮合于齿条633的不同位置,以同步带动齿条633移动。此时,齿条633的移动更为平稳。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括传动件634。传动件634的一端连接齿条633。传动件634的另一端连接反光件5。也即,传动件634连接在反光件5与齿条633之间。一种实现方式中,传动件634与齿条633可以一体成型。其他实现方式中,传动件634与齿条633也可以通过组装形成一体式结构。可以理解的是,其他实现方式中,驱动组件6未包括传动件634。通过对反光件5的结构进行设计,使得反光件5具有传动部(相当于前述传动件634),驱动组件6能够通过对传动部的控制,使得反光件5在停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间移动。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括导向杆635。导向杆635固定连接于模组支 架2。导向杆635的延伸方向平行于齿条633的延伸方向。传动件634设有导向孔。导向杆635穿过导向孔。导向杆635用于引导传动件634的移动方向,使得传动件634能够更平稳地带动反光件5移动。导向杆635与传动件634之间的滑动连接关系也可以通过在导向杆635和传动件634的一者中设T形块、另一者中设T形槽,由T形块与T形槽相配合实现。导向杆635与传动件634之间的滑动连接关系还可以通过其他配合结构实现,本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
再一种示例中,请参阅图10,图10是图3所示摄像模组10在再一种示例中的结构示意图。本示例中,驱动组件6的驱动方式为机械驱动方式。
在本示例中,驱动组件6可以包括电机641、绳轮642、传送绳643、弹簧固定座644以及弹簧645。电机641固定连接于模组支架2。绳轮642连接电机641,电机641用于驱动绳轮642转动。传送绳643的一端固定连接反光件5。传送绳643的另一端固定连接绳轮642。电机641用于驱动绳轮642转动,以使传送绳643缠绕至绳轮642或者自绳轮642上释放。电机641耦合电子设备100的处理器,电机641依据处理器发出的信号执行对应的操作,例如正转、反转、停止转动等。弹簧固定座644固定连接于模组支架2。弹簧645的一端连接或抵持于弹簧固定座644。弹簧645的另一端连接或抵持于反光件5。
电机641驱动绳轮642向第一方向转动时,传送绳643缠绕至绳轮642,传送绳643带动反光件5向左移动,并且在带动反光件5移动的过程中,克服弹簧645的弹力,压缩弹簧645,以使摄像模组10实现变焦。电机641驱动绳轮642向与第一方向相反的第二方向转动时,绳轮642释放传送绳643,反光件5在弹簧645的弹性力下向右移动,以使摄像模组10实现变焦。
一些实施例中,电机641可以为步进电机。此时,电机641的控制方式为闭环控制,能够提高对反光件5移动位置的控制精确度,使得驱动组件6的驱动动作更为可靠和精确,以保证摄像模组10的拍摄质量。
一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括弹簧中心轴646。弹簧中心轴646的一端固定连接弹簧固定座644。弹簧中心轴646的延伸方向平行于多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方向。弹簧645套设于弹簧中心轴646的外侧。此时,弹簧中心轴646能够在弹簧645的拉伸或压缩过程中限制弹簧645的移动,以避免弹簧645与传送绳643之间发生干涉,使得驱动组件6的可靠性更高。
一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括传动件647。传动件647的一端连接反光件5。传送绳643连接于传动件647的另一端,以间接连接至反光件5。弹簧645连接于或抵持于传送件的另一端,以间接连接或抵持于反光件5。可以理解的是,其他实现方式中,驱动组件6未包括传动件647。通过对反光件5的结构进行设计,使得反光件5具有传动部(相当于前述传动件647),驱动组件6能够通过对传动部的控制,使得反光件5在多个停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间移动。
一些实施例中,弹簧中心轴646远离弹簧固定座644的一端可以滑动连接传动件647,以对传动件647起到引导和限位作用,使得传动件647与反光件5的移动更为平稳。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括导向杆648。导向杆648的延伸方向平行于多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方向。传动件647设有导向孔。导向杆648穿过导向孔。导向杆648用于引导传动件647的移动方向,使得传动件647能够更平稳地带动反光件5移动。导向杆648与传动件647之间的滑动连接关系也可以通过在导向杆648和传动件647的一者中设T形块、另一者中设T形槽,由T形块与T形槽相配合实现。导向杆648与传动件 647之间的滑动连接关系还可以通过其他配合结构实现,本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
在另一些实施例中,传动件647连接传送绳643的位置可以位于传动件647连接导向杆648的位置与传动件647连接弹簧中心轴646的位置之间。此时,传动件647移动时同时被导向杆648和弹簧中心轴646限位,移动更为平稳。
其他一些实施例中,驱动组件6也可以不设置导向杆648,而通过弹簧中心轴646限定传动件647的移动方向。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括减速器(图中未示出)。减速器连接在电机641与绳轮642之间。减速器能够降低电机641的输出转速,提高输出扭矩。减速器可以呈现为齿轮箱。
可以理解的是,弹簧645也可以替换为其他弹性件。
再一种示例中,请参阅图11,图11是图3所示摄像模组10在再一种示例中的结构示意图。本示例中,驱动组件6的驱动方式为电磁驱动方式。
在本示例中,驱动组件6可以包括电磁铁651和磁性体652。磁性体652固定连接反光件5。电磁铁651固定连接于模组支架2。电磁铁651耦合处理器。电磁铁651依据处理器发出的信号执行对应的操作,例如产生排斥磁性体652的电磁场、产生吸引磁性体652的电磁场、不产生电磁场等。
在本示例中,通过控制电磁铁651的通电电流的大小和电流方向,以控制电磁铁651所产生的电磁场,也即控制电磁铁651对磁性件的磁性力的大小和位置,使得磁性体652靠近或远离电磁铁651,磁性体652得以带动反光件5移动至相应的停留位(61a、61b、61c),使得摄像模组10实现变焦。
一些实施例中,磁性体652可以为采用磁性材料的结构、永磁铁或电磁体。磁性体652为电磁体时,磁性体652耦合处理器50。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括传动件653。传动件653的一端连接磁性体652。传动件653的另一端连接反光件5。也即,传动件653连接在反光件5与磁性体652之间。一种实现方式中,传动件653与磁性体652可以一体成型。其他实现方式中,传动件653与磁性体652也可以通过组装形成一体式结构。可以理解的是,其他实现方式中,驱动组件6未包括传动件653。通过对反光件5的结构进行设计,使得反光件5具有传动部(相当于前述传动件653),驱动组件6能够通过对传动部的控制,使得反光件5在多个停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间移动。
在一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括导向杆654。导向杆654固定连接于模组支架2。导向杆654的延伸方向平行于多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方向。传动件653设有导向孔。导向杆654穿过导向孔。导向杆654用于引导传动件653的移动方向,使得传动件653能够更平稳地带动反光件5移动。导向杆654与传动件653之间的滑动连接关系也可以通过在导向杆654和传动件653的一者中设T形块、另一者中设T形槽,由T形块与T形槽相配合实现。导向杆654与传动件653之间的滑动连接关系还可以通过其他配合结构实现,本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
再一种示例中,请参阅图12,图12是图3所示摄像模组10在再一种示例中的结构示意图。在本示例中,驱动组件6的驱动方式为电磁驱动方式。
在本示例中,驱动组件6包括空心电磁铁661和磁芯662。空心电磁铁661固定连接于模组支架2。磁芯662的一端固定连接反光件5。磁芯662的另一端伸入空心电磁铁661中。空心电磁铁661耦合处理器。空心电磁铁661依据处理器发出的信号执行对应的操作,例如 产生排斥磁芯662的电磁场、产生吸引磁芯662的电磁场、不产生电磁场等。
在本示例中,通过控制空心电磁铁661的通电电流的大小和电流方向,以控制空心电磁铁661所产生的电磁场,也即控制空心电磁铁661对磁芯662的磁性力的大小和位置,使得磁芯662靠近或远离电磁铁651,磁芯662得以带动反光件5移动至相应的停留位(61a、61b、61c),使得摄像模组10实现变焦。
一些实施例中,磁芯662可以为采用磁性材料的结构、永磁铁或电磁体。磁芯662为电磁体时,磁芯662耦合处理器。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括传动件663。传动件663的一端连接磁芯662。传动件663的另一端连接反光件5。也即,传动件663连接在反光件5与磁芯662之间。一种实现方式中,传动件663与磁芯662可以一体成型。其他实现方式中,传动件663与磁芯662也可以通过组装形成一体式结构。可以理解的是,其他实现方式中,驱动组件6未包括传动件663。通过对反光件5的结构进行设计,使得反光件5具有传动部(相当于前述传动件663),驱动组件6能够通过对传动部的控制,使得反光件5在多个停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间移动。
在其他一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括导向杆664。导向杆664固定连接于模组支架2。导向杆664的延伸方向平行于多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方向。传动件663设有导向孔。导向杆664穿过导向孔。导向杆664用于引导传动件663的移动方向,使得传动件663能够更平稳地带动反光件5移动。导向杆664与传动件663之间的滑动连接关系也可以通过在导向杆664和传动件663的一者中设T形块、另一者中设T形槽,由T形块与T形槽相配合实现。导向杆664与传动件663之间的滑动连接关系还可以通过其他配合结构实现,本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
再一种示例中,请参阅图13,图13是图3所示摄像模组10在再一种示例中的结构示意图。本示例中,驱动组件6的驱动方式为手动调节式。
在本示例中,驱动组件6可以包括传动件671和导向杆672。传动件671固定连接反光件5。导向杆672固定连接于模组支架2。导向杆672的延伸方向平行于多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方向。传动件671设有导向孔。导向杆672穿过导向孔。导向杆672用于引导传动件671的移动方向,使得传动件671能够更平稳地带动反光件5移动。导向杆672与传动件671之间的滑动连接关系也可以通过在导向杆672和传动件671的一者中设T形块、另一者中设T形槽,由T形块与T形槽相配合实现。导向杆672与传动件671之间的滑动连接关系还可以通过其他配合结构实现,本申请对此不作严格限定。
传动件671远离反光件5的一端伸出模组支架2。一种实现方式中,传动件671远离反光件5的一端直接露出于电子设备100的外部,用户可以拨动传动件671,以带动反光件5在多个停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间移动,以反射等效焦距不同的镜头(31a、31b、31c)汇聚的光线,使得摄像模组10实现变焦。另一种实现方式中,驱动组件6还可以包括部分露出于电子设备100的外部的拨动件(未示出)。传动件671远离反光件5的一端与拨动件连接,用户可以移动拨动件,以带动传动件671和反光件5在多个停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间移动,使得摄像模组10实现变焦。在本实施例中,用户可以手动调节反光件5的位置,以满足拍摄需求,使得拍摄过程更具趣味性,提高了用户体验。
一些实施例中,传动件671(或拨动件)可以自摄像模组10的进光侧(也即设置镜头组3的一侧)伸出摄像模组10,也可以自摄像模组10的非进光侧伸出摄像模组10。可以理解的,传动件671(或拨动件)伸出摄像模组10的位置可以灵活设置,本申请对此不作严格限 定。
再一种示例中,请参阅图14,图14是图3所示摄像模组10在再一种示例中的结构示意图。本示例中,驱动组件6的驱动方式为手动调节式。
在本示例中,驱动组件6可以包括导向杆681、传动件682、限位件683、弹簧684、卡钩摆杆685、扭转弹簧686、卡钩摆杆铰链687、扭转弹簧限位件688以及压杆689。
导向杆681固定连接于模组支架2。导向杆681的延伸方向平行于多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方向。传动件682的一端固定连接反光件5,传动件682的另一端伸出于模组支架2的外部。限位件683的一端固定连接反光件5。此时,传动件682、反光件5及限位件683同步移动或静止。传动件682和限位件683中的一者或两者设有导向孔,以通过导向孔套设在导向杆681外侧,从而滑动连接导向杆681。此时,导向杆681通过传动件682和限位件683中的一者或两者、对反光件5的移动起到引导和限位作用,以使反光件5的移动更为平稳。传动件682和限位件683中的一者或两者与导向杆681的滑动连接方式也可以有其他方式,例如T形槽与T形块的配合。
弹簧684的一端抵持或连接限位件683,另一端抵持或连接模组支架2。卡钩摆杆685包括转动段6851和分别连接于转动段6851两端的按压段6852和限位段6853。卡钩摆杆685的转动段6851通过卡钩摆杆铰链687转动连接模组支架2。扭转弹簧限位件688固定连接于模组支架2。扭转弹簧686套设在卡钩摆杆铰链687外侧,且扭转弹簧686的一端抵持或连接扭转弹簧限位件688,扭转弹簧686的另一端抵持或连接卡钩摆杆685的限位段6853。卡钩摆杆685的限位段6853包括彼此间隔设置的多个限位卡钩6854。多个限位卡钩6854对应于多个停留位(61a、61b、61c),也即多个限位卡钩6854与多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)一一对应设置。多个限位卡钩6854用于在扭转弹簧686的弹性力下,勾住限位件683远离反光件5的一端,以对限位件683和反光件5的位置进行限定。压杆689滑动连接模组支架2。压杆689的一端伸出于模组支架2的外部,另一端正对卡钩摆杆685的按压段6852设置。
当反光件5处于静止状态时,弹簧684向上抵持限位件683,扭转弹簧686对卡钩摆杆685的限位段6853施加逆时针的弹性力,使得卡钩摆杆685的限位段6853抵持限位件683的一端,卡钩摆杆685的其中一个卡钩勾住限位件683,以使限位件683和反光件5保持平稳。
当反光件5需要向左移动时,用户向左拨动传动件682,限位件683沿导向杆681的延伸方向向左移动,限位件683克服弹簧684的弹性力而压缩弹簧684。限位件683碰到卡钩摆杆685的某个卡钩的右侧倾斜表面时,迫使卡钩摆杆685克服扭转弹簧686的弹性力而顺时针转动,以避让限位件683的左移动作。限位件683移动到位时,扭转弹簧686的弹性力使得卡钩摆杆685复位,卡钩摆杆685上的另一个卡钩勾住限位件683,以使限位件683和反光件5停留在某个停留位(61a/61b/61c)。
当反光件5需要向右移动时,用户推动压杆689,压杆689相对模组支架2移动,压杆689抵持卡钩摆杆685的按压段6852并推动卡钩摆杆685的按压段6852,卡钩摆杆685克服扭转弹簧686的弹性力而顺时针转动,卡钩摆杆685的卡钩释放限位件683,弹簧684的弹性力推动限位件683向右移动,限位件683带动反光件5向右移动。用于放开压杆689,反光件5移动到位时,扭转弹簧686的弹性力使得卡钩摆杆685复位,卡钩摆杆685上的另一个卡钩勾住限位件683,以使限位件683和反光件5停留在某个停留位(61a/61b/61c)。
在本示例中,用户能够通过控制传动件682和压杆689,从而手动控制反光件5在多个停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间移动,使得摄像模组10实现变焦。
一些实施例中,传动件682和限位件683可以为彼此独立的两个部件,分别固定连接反光件5。或者,传动件682可以与限位件683一体成型、或者通过组装形成一体式结构,然后固定连接反光件5。此时,施加于传动件682或限位件683上的作用力可以直接传递给彼此,无需经过反光件5,从而能够避免反光件5因受力较大而发生损坏的风险。
一些实施例中,弹簧684可以为阻尼弹簧,使得限位件683和反光件5的移动更为平稳。可以理解的是,在其他示例中,弹簧684也可以替换为其他弹性件。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括弹簧定位柱6810。弹簧定位柱6810固定连接模组支架2。弹簧定位柱6810的延伸方向平行于导向杆681的延伸方向。弹簧684套设于弹簧定位柱6810的外侧。此时,弹簧定位柱6810能够在弹簧684的拉伸或压缩过程中限制弹簧684的移动,以避免弹簧684与卡钩摆杆685之间发生干涉,使得驱动组件6的可靠性更高。其中,反光件5和限位件683中的一者或两者也可以滑动连接弹簧定位柱6810,弹簧定位柱6810与导向杆681同时对反光件5的移动起到导向和限位作用,使得反光件5的移动动作更为平稳。其他一些实施例中,驱动组件6也可以不设置弹簧定位柱6810,弹簧684可套设于导向杆681的外侧。
再一种示例中,请参阅图15,图15是图3所示摄像模组10在再一种示例中的结构示意图。本示例中,驱动组件6的驱动方式为手自一体调节式。
在本示例中,驱动组件6包括传动件691和自动驱动部分692。传动件691的一端固定连接反光件5,另一端伸出于模组支架2的外部。自动驱动部分692为没有自锁功能的运动机构。自动驱动部分692安装于模组支架2。自动驱动部分692连接传动件691。自动驱动部分692耦合处理器,用于依据处理器的发出的信号执行对应的操作,例如驱动传动件691左移或右移。
在本示例中,驱动组件6集成自动调节模式和手动调节模式。用户可以通过处理器向自动驱动部分692发送信号,以使自动驱动部分692驱动传动件691和反光件5移动,使得反光件5在不同的停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间切换,以反射等效焦距不同的镜头(31a、31b、31c)汇聚的光线,从而实现变焦。用户也可以手动移动传动件691,以带动反光件5移动,从而实现变焦。
一些实施例中,自动驱动部分692可以为机械驱动结构或电磁驱动结构等,本申请对自动驱动部分692的形式不作严格限定。
在另一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括导向杆693。导向杆693固定连接于模组支架2。导向杆693的延伸方向平行于多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方向。传动件691设有导向孔。导向杆693穿过导向孔。导向杆693用于引导传动件691的移动方向,使得传动件691能够更平稳地带动反光件5移动。导向杆693与传动件691之间的滑动连接关系也可以通过在导向杆693和传动件691的一者中设T形块、另一者中设T形槽,由T形块与T形槽相配合实现。导向杆693与传动件691之间的滑动连接关系还可以通过其他配合结构实现,本申请对此不作严格限定。
再一种示例中,请参阅图16,图16是图3所示摄像模组10在再一种示例中的结构示意图。本示例中,驱动组件6的驱动方式为智能材料变形调节式。
在本示例中,驱动组件6包括导向杆6101、传动件6102、第一记忆合金弹簧6103、第二记忆合金弹簧6104、第一激发元件6105及第二激发元件6106。
导向杆6101固定连接模组支架2。导向杆6101的延伸方向平行于多个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的排布方向。传动件6102的一端固定连接反光件5。传动件6102的另一端滑动连接导 向杆6101。传动件6102设有导向孔。导向杆6101穿过导向孔。导向杆6101用于引导传动件6102的移动方向,使得传动件6102能够更平稳地带动反光件5移动。
第一记忆合金弹簧6103和第二记忆合金弹簧6104在平行于导向杆6101的方向上排列,且分别位于传动件6102的两侧。第一记忆合金弹簧6103的一端抵持或连接于模组支架2,另一端抵持或连接传动件6102。第二记忆合金弹簧6104的一端抵持或连接于模组支架2,另一端抵持或连接传动件6102。第一激发元件6105和第二激发元件6106分别位于传动件6102的两侧,第一激发元件6105对应第一记忆合金弹簧6103设置,第二激发元件6106对应第二记忆合金弹簧6104设置。第一记忆合金弹簧6103受到第一激发元件6105激发后,温度升高、长度增加。当第一记忆合金弹簧6103的温度降低后,长度缩短、恢复至原状。第二记忆合金弹簧6104受到第二激发元件6106激发后,温度升高并且伸长。当第二记忆合金弹簧6104的温度降低后,长度缩短、恢复至原状。
图16示例中,第一记忆合金弹簧6103和第一激发元件6105位于传动件6102右侧,第二记忆合金弹簧6104和第二激发元件6106位于传动件6102左侧。当反光件5需要左移时,第一激发元件6105激发第一记忆合金弹簧6103,第一记忆合金弹簧6103温度升高、长度增加,从而推动传动件6102和反光件5左移,摄像模组10实现变焦。当第一激发元件6105停止激发第一记忆合金弹簧6103时,第一记忆合金弹簧6103温度降低、长度缩短,传动件6102和反光件5右移至初始位置。当反光件5需要右移时,第二激发元件6106激发第二记忆合金弹簧6104,第二记忆合金弹簧6104温度升高、长度增加,从而推动传动件6102和反光件5右移,摄像模组10实现变焦。当第二激发元件6106停止激发第二记忆合金弹簧6104时,第二记忆合金弹簧6104温度降低、长度缩短,传动件6102和反光件5左移至初始位置。
在本示例中,摄像模组10通过第一激发元件6105对第一记忆合金弹簧6103的控制、和第二激发元件6106对第二记忆合金弹簧6104的控制,驱动传动件6102和反光件5移动,使得反光件5在不同的停留位(61a、61b、61c)之间切换,以反射等效焦距不同的镜头(31a、31b、31c)汇聚的光线,从而实现变焦。
一些实施例中,第一激发元件6105可以是电驱动或者是磁驱动。第一激发元件6105为电驱动时,通过控制电流的大小,从而控制第一记忆合金弹簧6103的温度,以实现变形。第一激发元件6105为磁驱动时,第一记忆合金弹簧6103为具有磁性纳米颗粒的形状记忆合金。第一激发元件6105增加磁场大小时,第一记忆合金弹簧6103内的磁性纳米颗粒之间产生的碰撞增加,使得产生的热量增加,以实现形变。第二激发元件6106和第二记忆合金弹簧6104的设计可参阅第一激发元件6105和第一记忆合金弹簧6103。
一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括弹簧中心柱6107。弹簧中心柱6107的延伸方向平行于导向杆6101的延伸方向。传动件6102可以滑动连接弹簧中心柱6107。此时,弹簧中心柱6107与导向杆6101同时引导传动件6102的移动方向,使得传动件6102的移动更为平稳。
第一记忆合金弹簧6103套设于弹簧中心柱6107。第二记忆合金弹簧6104套设于弹簧中心柱6107。此时,弹簧中心柱6107可以在第一记忆合金弹簧6103和第二记忆合金弹簧6104的变形过程中,起到限位和引导作用,使得第一记忆合金弹簧6103和第二记忆合金弹簧6104沿预设的方向发生形变,以使驱动组件6的可靠性更高。
其他一些实施例中,驱动组件6也可以不设置弹簧中心柱6107,第一记忆合金弹簧6103和第二记忆合金弹簧6104可套设于导向杆6101的外侧。
可以理解的是,图8至图16所示示例是为了说明摄像模组10的驱动组件6的几种可能 的实现方式,摄像模组10的驱动组件6还可以有其他实现方式,本申请对此不作严格限定。
在本申请中,驱动组件6在摄像模组10中的位置可以有多种实施例,设计时可综合考虑摄像模组10内部的安装空间、摄像模组10外部的安装空间等因素。
一些实施例中,如图3所示,驱动组件6设置在反光件5远离镜头组3的一侧,镜头组3、反光件5以及驱动组件6大致排布在镜头组3的入光方向上。其中,用于传输驱动力的传动件可连接于反光件5背离镜头组3的表面上。在本实施例中,由于镜头组3、反光件5以及驱动组件6大致排布在一个方向上,因此摄像模组10的整体外形较为扁平,有利于应用该摄像模组10的电子设备100的薄型化。
另一些实施例中,请一并参阅图17和图18,图17是图2所示电子设备100的摄像模组10在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图,图18是图17所示摄像模组10在另一角度的结构示意图。其中,图17的示图所在平面对应于图2所示电子设备100的A-A线位置。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
镜头组3和反光件5的排列方向(例如摄像模组10的厚度方向Z)与反光件5和驱动组件6的排列方向(例如摄像模组10的长度方向Y)大致垂直。反光件5具有大致平行于镜头组3的入光方向的平面,用于传输驱动力的传动件可连接于该平面。在本实施例中,摄像模组10的镜头组3、反光件5以及驱动组件6的排布较为紧凑,摄像模组10的整体外形较为立体,摄像模组10与电子设备100的其他部件能够更紧凑地排布,有助于电子设备100优化内部部件的排布方案。
可以理解的是,图3和图17所示示例是摄像模组10的结构的两种排布关系,镜头组3、反光件5以及驱动组件6也可以有其他排布关系,本申请对此不作严格限定。
可以理解的是,本申请实施例中两个部件之间的垂直或平行的位置关系为理想状态,也允许存在稍许偏差。
在本申请实施例中,摄像模组10设有用于驱动反光件5转动的防抖组件,以通过反光件5的转动补偿实现光学防抖,从而避免在拍摄过程中,因人手的抖动导致光线无法对焦的问题,使得摄像模组10拍摄的图像清晰,用户使用体验较佳。其中,防抖组件可以通过多种驱动方式实现,例如多点电磁驱动反光件5转动、机械驱动(齿轮传动、连杆传动)反光件5转动、智能材料形变驱动反光件5转动等。
请一并参阅图19至图21,图19是图2所示电子设备100的摄像模组10在再一些实施例中的部分结构示意图,图20是图19所示摄像模组10的反光件5在另一角度的结构示意图,图21是图19所示摄像模组10的球形铰链的内部结构示意图。其中,图19的示图所在平面对应于图2所示电子设备100的A-A线位置。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
在一些实施例中,摄像模组10还可以包括固定架11和防抖组件9。固定架11固定连接驱动组件6。防抖组件9连接固定架11与反光件5,用于使反光件5能够相对固定架11转动。驱动组件6驱动固定架11活动时,反光件5随固定架11活动。防抖组件9驱动反光件5转动时,反光件5相对固定架11转动。
其中,固定架11可以包括第一臂部111和第二臂部112,第一臂部111与第二臂部112之间形成夹角。此时,固定架11大致呈L形。一种示例中,第一臂部111可以平行于镜头的主光轴,第二臂部112可以垂直于镜头的主光轴。例如,反光件5位于停留位61b时,对应于镜头31b。第一臂部111平行于镜头31b的主光轴314,第二臂部11垂直于镜头31b的主 光轴314。驱动组件6固定连接第二臂部112。反光件5呈三棱柱体。反光件5包括第一侧棱531以及连接第一侧棱531的第一表面532和第二表面533。第一表面532朝向第一臂部111。第二表面533朝向第二臂部112。第一侧棱531对应第一臂部111与第二臂部112的连接处设置。
防抖组件9可以包括球形铰链91和两组磁吸件92。球形铰链91连接在第一侧棱531与固定架11之间。反光件5可通球形铰链91相对固定架11转动。两组磁吸件92分别连接在第一表面532与第一臂部111之间以及第二表面533与第二臂部112之间。
一组磁吸件92可以对应于第一表面532远离第一侧棱531的端部设置,另一组磁吸件92可以对应于第二表面533远离第一侧棱531的端部设置。各组磁吸件92均包括至少两对磁吸件92。两对磁吸件92彼此间隔设置。两对磁吸件92的排列方向大致平行于第一侧棱531的延伸方向。每对磁吸件92中的一者固定于固定架11、另一者固定于反光件5。每对磁吸件92可以在通电时彼此相斥或彼此相吸。一种示例中,每对磁吸件92均包括一个电磁铁和一个磁性体。另一种示例中,每对磁吸件92均可以包括两个电磁铁。
在本实现方式中,通过控制两组磁吸件92的充放电动作和充电电流大小,可以控制反光件5实现三个方向自由度的转动,反光件5分别可以绕摄像模组10的宽度方向X、摄像模组10的长度方向Y以及摄像模组10的厚度方向Z转动,在加上驱动组件6能够驱动反光件5沿摄像模组10的宽度方向X移动,因此摄像模组10的反光件5能够实现四个自由度的防抖,摄像模组10的拍摄质量更佳。
其中,固定架11与反光件5的结构可以是对应设置的,以在第一臂部111与第一表面532之间形成活动空间,在第二臂部112与第二表面533之间形成活动空间。
其中,球形铰链91可以包括固定部911、转动部912以及连接部913。固定部911固定于固定架11。例如,固定部911可固定于第一臂部111与第二臂部112的交接处。转动部912转动安装于固定部911内侧。连接部913的一端连接转动部912,另一端连接反光件5。
可以理解的是,图19至图21所示防抖组件9也可以应用本申请其他实施例中的摄像模组10,例如图3所示摄像模组10、图19所示摄像模组10等。
在上述实施例中,图像传感器4的感光面与镜头组3的各个镜头的等效中心面之间可以有多种位置关系。例如:
一些实施例中,如图3所示,图像传感器4的感光面41垂直于镜头组3的各个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的等效中心面。一种示例中,反光件5的反光层51与镜头(31a、31b、31c)的主光轴之间形成45°夹角。反光件5的反光层51用于反射光线。
在本实施例中,各个镜头(31a、31b、31c)汇聚的光线被反光件5反射后,发生90°偏转后进入图像传感器4,光线在传播过程中能够充分利用摄像模组10的相垂直的两个方向上的空间,也即镜头(31a、31b、31c)的主光轴所在方向和图像传感器4的感光面41的垂直方向上的空间,使得摄像模组10中各部件的排布位置较为优化。
另一些实施例中,请参阅图22,图22是图2所示电子设备100的摄像模组10在再一些实施例中的部分结构示意图。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
图像传感器4的感光面41平行于镜头组3的各个镜头(31a、31b、31c)的等效中心面。其中,镜头的等效中心面为经过镜头的等效光心的直径所在面。摄像模组10还包括反射件12,反射件12用于将反光件5反射出的光线反射至图像传感器4。一种示例中,反光件5位于停留位61b,反光件5的反光层51与镜头31b的主光轴314之间形成45°夹角,反射件 12的反射层121垂直于反光件5的反光层51。反光件5的反光层51用于反射光线。反射件12的反射层121用于反射光线。
在本实施例中,经过镜头的光线依次被反光件5和反射件12反射后,发生180°偏转后进入图像传感器4。本实施例相较于前述实施例,通过增加反射部件(包括反光件5和反射件12)的数量,使得光线发生多次偏转,不仅使得图像传感器4的排布位置更为灵活,有利于提高摄像模组10的器件排布灵活度,也使得光线的传播路径较长,摄像模组10能够设置焦距更大的镜头,从而实现长焦拍摄或超长焦拍摄。
可以理解的是,在其他实施例中,反光件5或反射件12等反射部件的数量也可以是两个或三个以上,本申请对此不作严格限定。本申请的“以上”包括本数。反光件5或反射件12等反射部件的位置与镜头的等效中心面之间的位置也可以有其他关系,本申请对此不作严格限定。由于反射部件的数量及位置是配合图像传感器4的感光面41位置进行设置的,因此可以通过调整反射部件的数量及位置,使得图像传感器4的感光面41位置发生变化,也即图像传感器4的感光面41与镜头组3的镜头的等效中心面之间的位置关系发生变化,进而使摄像模组10能够实现更多样的结构方案和形态,适用范围更广。
图23是本申请另一实施例提供的电子设备100的后视图。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
图23示意出镜头组3的多个镜头31的另一种示例性的排布方式:多个镜头31入光方向一致,且多个镜头31呈阵列排布。其中,多个镜头31包括等效焦距不同的至少两个镜头。镜头31的结构可参阅前述图3实施例中镜头(31a、31b、31c)。多个镜头31在摄像模组10的宽度方向X上成行排列,在摄像模组10的长度方向Y上成列排列。
请一并参阅图24和图25,图24是图23所示电子设备100的摄像模组10在一些实施例中的部分结构示意图,图25是图24所示摄像模组10的内部结构示意图。
在本实施例中,摄像模组10包括多个图像传感器4、多个反光件5以及多组驱动组件6。排布于摄像模组10的宽度方向X的每一行镜头31对应于一个图像传感器4、一个反光件5以及一组驱动组件6,驱动组件6驱动对应的反光件5沿摄像模组10的宽度方向X移动。排布于摄像模组10的宽度方向X的同一行镜头31的等效焦距不同。
多个驱动组件6耦合处理器50(参阅图23),多个图像传感器4耦合处理器50。由于不同的驱动组件6可以彼此独立地驱动不同的反光件5,多个图像传感器4可以彼此独立工作,因此摄像模组10可以使某组驱动组件6和图像传感器4单独工作,以捕获一张图像,也可以同时使多组驱动组件6和图像传感器4同时工作,以捕获多张图像,摄像模组10的拍摄模式更为多样化。
一些实施例中,排布于摄像模组10的长度方向Y的同一列镜头31的等效焦距可以相同。摄像模组10可以通过同一列镜头31捕获的多张图像合成一张目标图像,以提高目标图像的图像质量。
在另一些实施例中,并列排布于摄像模组10的长度方向Y的多行模组结构(包括等效焦距、光圈及亮度等)可以相同。模组结构包括镜头31、反光件5以及图像传感器4等。此时,摄像模组10可以实现3D拍摄。例如,当多个反光件5在摄像模组10的长度方向Y上彼此对齐时,摄像模组10的多个图像传感器4通过对应的镜头31同时捕捉相同场景下的图像,通过对多张图像进行编辑和整合,形成3D图像。当多个反光件5同步地在摄像模组10的宽度方向X上移动、以切换停留位时,摄像模组10还可以实现3D图像的光学变焦。
其他一些实施例中,也可以是排布于摄像模组10的长度方向Y的一列镜头31对应于一 个图像传感器4、一个反光件5以及一组驱动组件6,驱动组件6驱动反光件5沿摄像模组10的长度方向Y移动。排布于摄像模组10的长度方向Y的同一行镜头31的等效焦距不同。
请一并参阅图26和图27,图26是图23所示电子设备100的摄像模组10在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图,图27是图26所示摄像模组10的内部结构示意图。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
在本实施例中,摄像模组10可以包括多个图像传感器4、一个反光件5以及一组驱动组件6。排布于摄像模组10的宽度方向X的每一行镜头31对应于一个图像传感器4。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5移动。驱动组件6包括第一驱动部分6a和第二驱动部分6b。第一驱动部分6a用于驱动反光件5在摄像模组10的长度方向Y上移动,第二驱动部分6b用于驱动反光件5在摄像模组10的宽度方向X上移动。通过第一驱动部分6a与第二驱动部分6b的配合,反光件5能够在与多个镜头31相对应的多个停留位61之间移动,使得摄像模组10实现变焦。停留位61的描述可参阅前述图3实施例中停留位(61a、61b、61c)的相关描述。
其中,不同行的镜头31与图像传感器4之间的距离可以是不同的,镜头组3的多个镜头的等效焦距可以彼此不同。另外,多个图像传感器4在摄像模组10的长度方向Y上错开排列。在镜头数量相等的情况下,本实施例所示摄像模组10相较于前述实施例所示摄像模组10,具有更多样化的拍摄模式,能够提高用户体验。其他实施例中,镜头组3的多个镜头中,排布于摄像模组10的长度方向Y的同一列镜头31的等效焦距可以相同。此时,多个图像传感器4沿平行于摄像模组10的长度方向Y的方向排列。
图28是图23所示电子设备100的摄像模组10在再一些实施例中的部分结构示意图,图29是图28所示摄像模组10的内部结构示意图。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
在本实施例中,摄像模组10可以包括一个图像传感器4、一个反光件5以及一组驱动组件6。图像传感器4位于镜头组3的一侧且靠近中部的位置。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5移动和转动。驱动组件6包括第一驱动部分6c、第二驱动部分6d以及第三驱动部分6e。第一驱动部分6c用于驱动反光件5沿第一方向移动,第二驱动部分6d用于驱动反光件5沿第二方向移动,第二方向垂直于第一方向,第三驱动部分6e用于驱动反光件5绕第三方向转动,第三方向垂直于第一方向和第二方向。
一种示例中,第一驱动部分6c用于驱动反光件5在摄像模组10的长度方向Y上移动,第二驱动部分6d用于驱动反光件5在摄像模组10的宽度方向X上移动,第三驱动部分6e用于驱动反光件5绕摄像模组10的厚度方向Z转动。
在本实施例中,第一驱动部分6c与第二驱动部分6d相配合,能够将反光件5移动至正对目标镜头31的位置处,第三驱动部分6e驱动反光件5转动,能够使反光件5转动至目标停留位61。由于反光件5能够转动,因此不同镜头31汇聚的光线被反射的方向可以不同,故而摄像模组10能够通过可转动的反光件5将不同位置的镜头31汇聚的光线反射至同一个图像传感器4。故而,通过第一驱动部分6c、第二驱动部分6d以及第三驱动部分6e的配合,反光件5能够在与多个镜头31相对应的多个停留位61之间切换,且将通过镜头31的光线反射至同一图像传感器4,使得摄像模组10实现变焦。其中,图像传感器4的感光面41面积相较于前述实施例,可以相同、相似或者小幅度增大。
一些实施例中,处理器可以设有图像畸变矫正单元。该图像畸变矫正单元用于矫正图像传感器4所接收的图像,以克服由于镜头31、反光件5及图像传感器4不在一个平面而导致图像传感器4所接受图像发生畸变的问题,从而保证电子设备100的拍摄质量。其他一些实 施例中,摄像模组10可以设置有内部处理器,摄像模组10的内部处理器耦合电子设备100的处理器,图像畸变矫正单元可以设置于摄像模组10的内部处理器。
在另一些实施例中,镜头组3的多个镜头31中,排布于摄像模组10的长度方向Y的同一列镜头31的等效焦距可以相同。其他一些实施例中,通过设置图像传感器4的位置,使得多个镜头31的等效焦距彼此不同。此时,摄像模组10具有更多样化的拍摄模式,能够提高用户体验。
请参阅图30,图30是本申请另一实施例提供的电子设备100的后视图。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
图30示意出镜头组3的多个镜头31的再一种示例性的排布方式:多个镜头31入光方向一致,且多个镜头31呈环形排布。其中,多个镜头31包括等效焦距不同的至少两个镜头。镜头31的结构可参阅前述图3实施例中镜头(31a、31b、31c)。环形可以是图30所示的圆环形,也可以是椭圆环形或其他环形。
请一并参阅图31和图32,图31是图30所示电子设备100的摄像模组10在一些实施例中的部分结构示意图,图32是图31所示摄像模组10的内部结构示意图。
在本实施例中,摄像模组10包括一个图像传感器4、一个反光件5以及一组驱动组件6。图像传感器4位于镜头组3的一侧。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5移动和转动。驱动组件6包括第一驱动部分6f、第二驱动部分6g以及第三驱动部分6h。第一驱动部分6f用于驱动反光件5沿第一方向移动,第二驱动部分6g用于驱动反光件5沿第二方向移动,第二方向垂直于第一方向,第三驱动部分6h用于驱动反光件5绕第三方向转动,第三方向垂直于第一方向和第二方向。通过第一驱动部分6f、第二驱动部分6g以及第三驱动部分6h的配合,反光件5能够在与多个镜头31相对应的多个停留位61之间移动,且将通过镜头31的光线反射至图像传感器4,使得摄像模组10实现变焦。停留位61的描述可参阅前述图3实施例中停留位(61a、61b、61c)的相关描述。
一种示例中,第一驱动部分6f用于驱动反光件5在摄像模组10的长度方向Y上移动,第二驱动部分6g用于驱动反光件5在摄像模组10的宽度方向X上移动,第三驱动部分6h用于驱动反光件5绕摄像模组10的厚度方向Z转动。
一些实施例中,电子设备100的处理器50(参阅图30)设有图像畸变矫正单元。该图像畸变矫正单元用于矫正图像传感器4所接收的图像,以克服由于镜头31、反光件5及图像传感器4不在一个平面而导致图像传感器4所接受图像发生畸变的问题,从而保证电子设备100的拍摄质量。其他实施例中,摄像模组10可以设置有内部处理器,摄像模组10的内部处理器耦合电子设备100的处理器50,图像畸变矫正单元可以设置于摄像模组10的内部处理器。
其他一些实施例中,多个镜头的排布方式也可以为:多个镜头的入光方向一致,且多个镜头呈三角排布。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5移动和转动。本实施例中,摄像模组10的图像传感器4、反光件5及驱动组件6可参阅前述实施例设置。
请参阅图33,图33是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备100的正视图。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
电子设备100的壳体20包括主壳部201和活动壳部202。活动壳部202可伸缩地安装于主壳部201。电子设备100还包括壳部驱动组件203,壳部驱动组件203安装于主壳部201,壳部驱动组件203用于驱动活动壳部202相对主壳部201伸出或缩回。一种示例中,活动壳部202可以滑动连接主壳部201,以滑出主壳部201或滑入主壳部201。另一种示例中,活动壳部202可以转动连接主壳部201,以转出主壳部201或转入主壳部201。摄像模组10安装 于活动壳部202。摄像模组10随活动壳部202移动。
在本实施例中,由于摄像模组10能够随活动壳部202相对主壳部201伸缩,因此可以在需要进行拍摄时,伸出摄像模组10以使镜头组3露出于电子设备100外部,从而采集图像,在无需拍摄时,缩回摄像模组10以使镜头组3位于电子设备100内部。故而,电子设备100的主壳部201可以不预留用于对应摄像模组10的摄像孔或摄像区域,而进行全面板设计,例如全面屏设计、全面后盖设计等。
其中,摄像模组10可以采集电子设备100前方的图像。此时,摄像模组10的作为电子设备100的前置摄像头使用。或者,摄像模组10可以采集电子设备100后方的图像。此时,摄像模组10的作为电子设备100的后置摄像头使用。
请参阅图34,图34是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备100的正视图。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
电子设备100的壳体20包括主壳部201和活动壳部202。活动壳部202可伸缩地安装于主壳部201。活动壳部202相对主壳部201伸出后,可以相对主壳部201转动。电子设备100还包括壳部驱动组件203,壳部驱动组件203安装于主壳部201,壳部驱动组件203用于驱动活动壳部202相对主壳部201伸出或缩回、以及驱动活动壳部202相对主壳部201伸出后转动。一种示例中,活动壳部202可以滑动连接主壳部201,以滑出主壳部201或滑入主壳部201,在滑出主壳部201后能够相对主壳部201转动。另一种示例中,活动壳部202可以转动连接主壳部201,以转出主壳部201或转入主壳部201,在转出主壳部201后能够相对主壳部201转动。摄像模组10安装于活动壳部202。摄像模组10随活动壳部202移动。
在本实施例中,由于摄像模组10能够随活动壳部202相对主壳部201伸缩,因此可以在需要进行拍摄时,伸出摄像模组10以使镜头组3露出于电子设备100外部,从而采集图像,在无需拍摄时,缩回摄像模组10以使镜头组3位于电子设备100内部。故而,电子设备100的主壳部201可以不预留用于对应摄像模组10的摄像孔或摄像区域,而进行全面板设计,例如全面屏设计、全面后盖设计等。由于活动壳部202相对主壳部201伸出后,能够相对主壳部201转动,因此摄像模组10能够作为电子设备100的前置摄像头使用,也可以作为电子设备100的后置摄像头使用。
可以理解的是,在其他一些实施例中,电子设备100的壳体20也可以为可折叠壳体,可折叠壳体包括两个平板部分及连接于两个平板部分之间的弯曲部分,摄像模组10可安装于其中一个平板部分。
请参阅图35,图35是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备100的侧视图。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
图35示意出镜头组3的多个镜头的再一种示例性的排布方式:多个镜头的入光方向不同。一种示例中,多个镜头包括第一镜头33和第二镜头34。第一镜头33和第二镜头34的结构可参阅前述图3实施例中镜头(31a、31b、31c)。第一镜头33和第二镜头34背对背排布且入光方向相反。例如,第一镜头33能够采集电子设备100前方的图像,第二镜头34的能够采集电子设备100后方的图像。此时,摄像模组10可以作为电子设备100的前置摄像头使用,也可以作为电子设备100的后置摄像头使用。
一些实施例中,第一镜头33的等效焦距与第二镜头34的等效焦距不同。此时,摄像模组10通过切换反光件的停留位,既能够切换拍摄方位,也能够实现变焦。另一些实施例中,第一镜头33的等效焦距与第二镜头34的等效焦距相同。
其他示例中,镜头组3的入光方向不同的镜头的数量也可以是三个以上,镜头组3的镜 头的入光方向也可以有其他设计方案。
请一并参阅图36和图37,图36是图35所示电子设备100的摄像模组10的内部结构示意图,图37是图36所示结构在另一角度的结构示意图。
多个镜头环绕地排布于反光件5的周边。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5转动。一种示例中,第一镜头33和第二镜头34分别位于反光件5的相背两侧。驱动组件6能够驱动反光件5在分别面向两个镜头(33、34)的两个停留位(61d、61f)之间转动。停留位61d对应于镜头33,反光件5位于停留位61d时,能够将镜头33汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器4。停留位61f对应于镜头34,反光件5位于停留位61f时,能够将镜头34汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器4。反光件5的转轴方向垂直于第一镜头33和第二镜头34的连线方向。驱动组件6驱动反光件5绕其转轴转动。
在本实施例中,由于镜头组3的多个镜头的入光方向不同,反光件5能够转动以采集不同镜头汇聚的光线,因此摄像模组10能够实现多方位拍摄,拍摄功能更为多样化。
驱动组件6包括马达6111和转轴6112。转轴6112的一端连接马达6111,另一端固定连接反光件5。马达6111用于驱动转轴6112转动,以带动反光件5转动。马达6111固定安装于模组支架2。
一些实施例中,模组支架2还可以包括限位板(图未示出)。转轴6112穿过限位板,且转动连接限位板。转轴6112与限位板之间可通过轴承连接。此时,限位板能够支撑和限位转轴6112,使得驱动组件6的可靠性更高。
一些实施例中,驱动组件6还可以包括齿轮组(图未示出)。齿轮组包括彼此啮合连接的多个齿轮。齿轮组的其中一个齿轮为输入齿轮,输入齿轮固定连接马达6111。齿轮组的其中一个齿轮为输出齿轮,输出齿轮固定连接转轴6112。齿轮组能够将马达6111的动力传输至转轴6112。通过设计齿轮组中的齿轮的齿数,可以调节马达6111的输出转速与转轴6112的转速比,从而降低马达6111的输出转速,提高输出扭矩。
可以理解的是,在本实施例中,可以通过改变反光件5的反光层51的朝向,使得图像传感器4的位置有多种实现方式。例如,图36中,镜头(33、34)汇聚的光线被反光件5的反光层51反射后,在YZ平面上传输,YZ平面为摄像模组10的长度方向Y和厚度方向Z所在平面。图像传感器4的感光面41平行于XZ平面,XZ平面为摄像模组10的宽度方向X和厚度方向Z所在平面。其他一些实施例中,镜头汇聚的光线被反光件5的反光层51反射后,在XZ平面上传输,图像传感器4的感光面41平行于YZ平面。
请参阅图38,图38是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备100的侧视图。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
图38示意出镜头组3的多个镜头的再一种示例性的排布方式:镜头组3包括至少两组入光方向不同的子镜头组35。各子镜头组35均包括多个入光方面一致且等效焦距不同的镜头31。镜头31的结构可参阅前述图3实施例中镜头(31a、31b、31c)。各子镜头组35中的多个镜头31的排布方式可参阅前述实施例。本实施例中,以子镜头组35的多个镜头31的排布方式与前述实施例相同为例进行说明。
本实施例中,两组子镜头组35中的其中一组子镜头组35可以拍摄电子设备100前方的图像,另一组子镜头组35可以拍摄电子设备100后方的图像。也即,镜头组3具有两个方向相反的拍摄方位。此时,摄像模组10可以作为电子设备100的前置摄像头使用,也可以作为电子设备100的后置摄像头使用。其他一些实施例中,两组子镜头组35的入光方向也可以有其他设计方案。
一种示例中,显示屏30中设有透光孔或透光部分,摄像模组10位于显示屏30下方,其中一组子镜头组35通过透光孔或透光部分进行拍摄,实现屏下拍摄。另一种示例中,摄像模组10通过显示屏30的非显示区进行拍摄。显示屏30可以为刘海屏或水滴屏,此时,显示屏30的非显示区包括刘海区域或水滴区域。显示屏30也可以为较为规整的矩形屏幕,此时,显示屏30的顶部空间或底部空间形成非显示区。
一种示例中,电子设备100的后盖开设摄像孔,另一组子镜头组35通过摄像孔进行拍摄。另一种示例中,电子设备100的后盖设有透光区,另一组子镜头组35通过透光区进行拍摄,电子设备100的后盖能够实现全面板设计。
两组子镜头组35的镜头31的等效焦距可以相同,也可以不同。例如,两组子镜头组35分别为第一子镜头组和第二子镜头组。一种示例中,第一子镜头组的镜头数量与第二子镜头组的镜头数量相同。第一子镜头组中的多个镜头的等效焦距与第二子镜头组的多个镜头的等效焦距一一对应地相同。或者,第一子镜头组中的部分镜头的等效焦距与第二子镜头组的部分镜头的等效焦距一一对应地相同,第一子镜头组中的其余镜头的等效焦距与第二子镜头组中的其他镜头的等效焦距不同。或者,第一子镜头组中的多个镜头的等效焦距与第二子镜头组的多个镜头的等效焦距不同。另一种示例中,第一子镜头组的镜头数量与第二子镜头组的镜头数量不同。第一子镜头组和第二子镜头组中存在等效焦距相同的镜头,也存在等效焦距不同的镜头31;或者第一子镜头组和第二子镜头组中,其中一者的全部镜头与另一者的部分镜头31等效焦距相同,或其中一者的全部镜头与另一者的部分镜头等效焦距不同。
请一并参阅图39和图40,图39是图38所示电子设备100的摄像模组10的内部结构示意图,图40是图39所示结构在另一角度的结构示意图。
反光件5位于两组子镜头组35之间。两组子镜头组35背对背设置。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5移动和转动。摄像模组10的停留位包括对应于两组子镜头组35的两组停留位61。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5转动,以在两组停留位61之间切换;驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5移动,以在同一组停留位61的多个停留位61之间切换。停留位61的描述可参阅前述图3实施例中停留位(61a、61b、61c)的相关描述。
在本实施例中,由于两组子镜头组35的入光方向不同,各子镜头组35均包括多个等效焦距不同的镜头31,驱动组件6能够驱动反光件5移动和转动,以在不同的停留位61之间切换,使得图像传感器4能够接收经各个镜头31汇聚的光线,故而摄像模组10既能够实现变焦拍摄,也能够实现多方位拍摄,摄像模组10的功能更为多样化。
驱动组件6包括驱动移动组件6121、连接杆6122、马达板6123、马达6124、齿轮组6125以及转轴6126。驱动移动组件6121安装于模组支架2。连接杆6122的一端连接驱动移动组件6121,驱动移动组件6121用于驱动连接杆6122移动。驱动移动组件6121可依据单个子镜头组35中的多个镜头31的排布方式,对应地参阅前述实施例的驱动组件6的结构。马达板6123连接于连接杆6122的另一端。马达6124安装于马达板6123。转轴6126穿过马达板6123且转动连接马达板6123。转轴6126与马达板6123之间可通过轴承连接。此时,马达板6123能够支撑和限位转轴6126,使得驱动组件6的可靠性更高。马达6124与转轴6126的一端之间通过齿轮组6125连接。转轴6126的另一端连接反光件5。
其中,齿轮组6125包括彼此啮合连接的多个齿轮。齿轮组6125的其中一个齿轮为输入齿轮,输入齿轮固定连接马达6124。齿轮组6125的其中一个齿轮为输出齿轮,输出齿轮固定连接转轴6126。齿轮组6125能够将马达6124的动力传输至转轴6126。通过设计齿轮组6125中的齿轮的齿数,可以调节马达6124的输出转速与转轴6126的转速比,从而降低马达 6124的输出转速,提高输出扭矩。
可以理解的是,前述实施例中,由一个驱动组件6驱动一个反光件5活动(移动和转动),从而满足两组子镜头组35的拍摄需求。其他一些实施例中,也可以由一个驱动组件驱动一个反光件移动,以满足其中一个子镜头组的拍摄需求,由另一个驱动组件驱动另一个反光件移动,以满足另一个子镜头组的拍摄需求。此时,图像传感器的数量可以为两个,或者两个图像传感器合并为一个面积较大的图像传感器。本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
可以理解的是,在前述实施例中,电子设备100的壳体20示意为组装后呈一体式的结构,摄像模组10安装于壳体20后,相对于显示屏30固定。其他一些实施例中,电子设备100的壳体20包括主壳部和活动壳部。活动壳部可伸缩地安装于主壳部201。摄像模组10安装于活动壳部。此时,电子设备100的显示屏30及后盖均能够实现全面板设计。其他一些实施例中,电子设备100的壳体20也可以为可折叠壳体,可折叠壳体包括两个平板部分及连接于两个平板部分之间的弯曲部分,摄像模组10可安装于其中一个平板部分。
请参阅图41,图41是本申请再一实施例提供的电子设备100的正视图。以下主要描述本实施例与前述实施例的区别,本实施例与前述实施例相同的大部分技术内容后文不再赘述。
本实施例中,以电子设备100为全景相机为例进行描述。全景相机可应用于无人机系统、深海或高空探测系统、监测系统等。其他一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以为电子眼等具有多面拍摄需求的设备。
电子设备100包括摄像模组10和壳体70。摄像模组10安装于壳体70中。摄像模组10的镜头组的多个镜头31的入光方向不同。镜头31的结构可参阅前述图3实施例中镜头(31a、31b、31c)。多个镜头31环绕地排布于反光件5的周边。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5转动。
在本实施例中,镜头31的数量多于两个,镜头组具有三个以上的入光方向。镜头组的入光方向越多,摄像模组10的拍摄视角越多,视场死角越少,有利于实现全景拍摄和3D拍摄。
此外,目前在一些需要多视场拍摄,并且要求有防水、防尘、高压等极端条件的环境(例如深海探测等)中,传统能够实现圆周拍摄的设备,往往需要摄像头随着拍摄角度的变化相对于基座有相对运动,在防尘和防水上需要做活动密封装置。但是,即使设置有活动密封装置,也难免会发生泄漏的情况,并且活动密封装置存在运动摩擦处磨损老化的现象,导致设备的寿命缩短、可靠性较低。而本实施例中摄像模组10,其模组支架可以从外部将摄像模组10其他部件完全密封在其内侧,镜头组无需移动,而是通过位于模组支架内侧的反光件5的转动实现变焦,极大地提高了摄像模组10的密封性,摄像模组10的使用寿命较长、可靠性较高,可以适用于需要防水、防尘、高压等极端条件的环境中。
一些实施例中,多个镜头31可以包括等效焦距不同的至少两个镜头。另一些实施例中,多个镜头31的等效焦距相同。
请参阅图42,图42是图41所示电子设备100的摄像模组10在多种实施例中的结构示意图。图42的示图所在平面对应于图41中B-B线所在位置。
如图42所示,一些实施例中,摄像模组10的模组支架2可以整体呈三棱柱状或者部分呈三棱柱状,镜头组的三个镜头31分别安装于三棱柱的三个侧边,摄像模组10具有三个拍摄视角。反光件5可转动地位于三个镜头31的中心位置。
另一些实施例中,摄像模组10的模组支架2可以整体呈长方体状或者部分呈长方体状,镜头组的四个镜头31分别安装于长方体的四个侧面,摄像模组10具有四个拍摄视角。反光件5可转动地位于四个镜头31的中心位置。
再一些实施例中,摄像模组10的模组支架2可以整体呈圆柱状或部分呈圆柱体状,镜头 组的多个镜头31(例如图示四个或六个)可以均匀排布于圆柱体的周侧面上。反光件5可转动地位于多个镜头31的中心位置。
在其他一些实施例中,摄像模组10的模组支架2可以有其他形状,例如六角柱状、椭圆柱状等,镜头组的多个镜头31也可以有其他排布结构,本申请对此不作严格限定。
其他实施例中,摄像模组10的模组支架2的每一面也可以排布多个镜头31,多个镜头31的排布方式不作严格限定。例如,镜头组3包括至少两组入光方向不同的子镜头组,各子镜头组均包括多个入光方向一致且等效焦距不同的镜头31,反光件5位于两组子镜头组之间,驱动组件用于驱动反光件5移动和转动。具体结构可结合参考前述实施例设置。
在本实施例中,由于子镜头组包括多个入光方向一致且等效焦距不同的镜头31,因此摄像模组10能够在3D拍摄的过程中,增加焦距的变化,在获得不同视角的拍摄的同时,也配合长焦镜头31对于远处物体的捕捉动作,使得远处物体的拍摄图像能够具备更加精细的3D变化。
上述实施例中,摄像模组10的图像传感器4可以位于反光件5的转轴方向上,图像传感器4的感光面大致垂直于反光件5的转轴方向。
请一并参阅图43和图44,图43是图41所示电子设备100的摄像模组10在另一些实施例中的结构示意图,图44是图43所示摄像模组10的内部结构示意图。图44的示图所在平面对应于图43中C-C线所在位置。
摄像模组10的镜头组的多个镜头31的入光方向不同。镜头31的结构可参阅前述图3实施例中镜头(31a、31b、31c)。多个镜头31环绕地排布于反光件5的周边。驱动组件6用于驱动反光件5转动和移动。本实施例中,镜头组3的多个镜头31可以大致呈球面或椭球面排布,以具有更多的视场角度。
一些实施例中,多个镜头31可以包括等效焦距不同的至少两个镜头。另一些实施例中,多个镜头31的等效焦距相同。
一种示例中,如图44所示,图像传感器4安装于模组支架2的底部。驱动组件6包括转轴机构6m、滑块机构6n及反光件转动机构6o。转轴机构6m包括转轴及第一驱动件,转轴的延伸方向垂直于图像传感器4的感光面41,第一驱动件用于驱动转轴转动。滑块机构6n包括滑块和第二驱动件,滑块套设于转轴外侧,第二驱动件用于驱动滑块相对转轴沿垂直于图像传感器4的感光面41的方向滑动。反光件转动机构6o包括转动铰链及第三驱动件,转动铰链连接反光件5和滑块,第三驱动件用于驱动反光件5相对滑块转动。在本实施例中,驱动组件6能够驱动反光件5在对应于多个镜头31的多个停留位之间切换,使得摄像模组10实现变焦。
在本申请上述实施例中,驱动组件驱动反光件在多个停留位之间切换,是以驱动组件对反光件的位置调节为有级调节为例进行说明的。在其他一些实施例中,驱动组件对反光件的调节也可以为无级调节。反光件除了能停留在前述多个停留位上,也可以停留在相邻的停留位之间。此时,邻近反光件目前停留位置的一个或多个停留位所对应的镜头汇聚的光线能够被反光件反射至图像传感器。这样,摄像模组的拍摄方式更为多样化,能够提高用户的拍摄体验。
在本申请上述实施例中,摄像模组包括可活动的反光件和多个镜头,通过驱动组件驱动反光件活动,使反光件的位置发生变化,反光件能够将多个镜头中的至少一个镜头汇聚的光线反射至图像传感器,从而既满足了多种拍摄需求,也降低了摄像模组的成本。
以上,仅为本申请的具体实施例,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术 领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内;在不冲突的情况下,本申请的实施例及实施例中的特征可以相互组合。因此,本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。
需要指出的是,本专利申请文件的一部分包含受著作权保护的内容。除了对专利局的专利文件或记录的专利文档内容制作副本以外,著作权人保留著作权。
Claims (17)
- 一种摄像模组,其特征在于,包括镜头组、图像传感器、反光件以及驱动组件,所述镜头组包括多个镜头,所述反光件用于将所述多个镜头中的至少一个所述镜头汇聚的光线反射至所述图像传感器,所述驱动组件用于驱动所述反光件活动。
- 根据权利要求1所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述反光件能够在多个停留位上停留,所述多个停留位与所述多个镜头一一对应设置,所述驱动组件用于驱动所述反光件在所述多个停留位之间切换。
- 根据权利要求1或2所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述多个镜头的入光方向一致,所述多个镜头的等效焦距不同,所述多个镜头呈直线排布,所述驱动组件用于驱动所述反光件移动,且所述反光件的移动方向平行于所述多个镜头的排布方向。
- 根据权利要求3所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述驱动组件包括电机、丝杠及螺母,所述螺母套设在所述丝杠外侧且螺纹连接所述丝杠,所述反光件固定连接所述螺母,所述电机用于驱动所述丝杠转动,以通过所述螺母带动所述反光件在多个停留位之间移动。
- 根据权利要求1或2所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述多个镜头的入光方向一致,所述多个镜头的等效焦距不同,所述多个镜头呈三角排布、阵列排布或环形排布,所述驱动组件用于驱动所述反光件移动和转动。
- 根据权利要求5所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述驱动组件包括第一驱动部分、第二驱动部分及第三驱动部分,所述第一驱动部分用于驱动所述反光件沿第一方向移动,所述第二驱动部分用于驱动所述反光件沿第二方向移动,所述第二方向垂直于所述第一方向,所述第三驱动部分用于驱动所述反光件绕第三方向转动,所述第三方向垂直于所述第一方向和所述第二方向,所述第三方向平行于所述多个镜头的的入光方向。
- 根据权利要求1或2所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述多个镜头的入光方向不同,所述多个镜头环绕地排布于所述反光件的周边;所述驱动组件用于驱动所述反光件转动,或者,所述驱动组件用于驱动所述反光件转动和移动。
- 根据权利要求7所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述多个镜头包括第一镜头和第二镜头,所述第一镜头与所述第二镜头背对背排布且入光方向相反,所述反光件的转轴方向垂直于所述第一镜头与所述第二镜头的连线方向。
- 根据权利要求1或2所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述镜头组包括至少两组入光方向不同的子镜头组,各所述子镜头组均包括多个入光方向一致且等效焦距不同的镜头,所述反光件位于两组所述子镜头组之间,所述驱动组件用于驱动所述反光件移动和转动。
- 根据权利要求9所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,同一所述子镜头组中的多个所述镜头呈直线排布、三角排布、阵列排布或环形排布。
- 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述图像传感器的感光面垂直于所述镜头组的各个所述镜头的等效中心面,其中,所述镜头的等效中心面为经过所述镜头的等效光心的直径所在面。
- 根据权利要求12所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述反光件还包括基底;所述反光层形成于所述基底朝向对应于所述反光件的所述镜头的一侧表面;或者,所述基底采用透光材料,所述基底包括第一侧表面、第二侧表面以及第三侧表面,所述第一侧表面朝向对应于所述反光件的所述镜头,所述第二侧表面朝向所述图像传感器,所述反光层形成于所述第三侧表面,用于将自所述第一侧表面进入所述基底的光线反射向所述第二侧表面。
- 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述图像传感器的感光面平行于所述镜头组的各个所述镜头的等效中心面,其中,所述镜头的等效中心面为经过所述镜头的等效光心的直径所在面;所述摄像模组还包括反射件,所述反射件用于将所述反光件反射出的光线反射至所述图像传感器。
- 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述摄像模组还包括固定架和防抖组件,所述固定架固定连接所述驱动组件,所述防抖组件连接所述固定架与所述反光件,用于使所述反光件能够相对所述固定架转动。
- 根据权利要求15所述的摄像模组,其特征在于,所述固定架包括第一臂部和第二臂部,所述第一臂部与所述第二臂部之间形成夹角;所述反光件呈三棱柱体,所述反光件包括第一侧棱以及连接所述第一侧棱的第一表面和第二表面,所述第一表面朝向所述第一臂部,所述第二表面朝向所述第二臂部;所述防抖组件包括球形铰链和两组磁吸件,所述球形铰链连接在所述第一侧棱与所述固定架之间,所述两组磁吸件分别连接在所述第一表面与所述第一臂部之间以及所述第二表面与所述第二臂部之间。
- 一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括壳体及权利要求1至16中任一项所述的摄像模组,所述摄像模组安装于所述壳体。
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
EP20805425.4A EP3920522A4 (en) | 2019-05-10 | 2020-05-09 | CAMERA MODULE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE |
US17/604,888 US12069357B2 (en) | 2019-05-10 | 2020-05-09 | Camera module with fixed lenses and electronic device |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN201910387745 | 2019-05-10 | ||
CN201910387745.0 | 2019-05-10 | ||
CN201910738974.2 | 2019-08-12 | ||
CN201910738974.2A CN111917946B (zh) | 2019-05-10 | 2019-08-12 | 摄像模组及电子设备 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2020228648A1 true WO2020228648A1 (zh) | 2020-11-19 |
Family
ID=73242702
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2020/089477 WO2020228648A1 (zh) | 2019-05-10 | 2020-05-09 | 摄像模组及电子设备 |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US12069357B2 (zh) |
EP (1) | EP3920522A4 (zh) |
CN (2) | CN111917946B (zh) |
DE (1) | DE202020006055U1 (zh) |
WO (1) | WO2020228648A1 (zh) |
Cited By (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN112637452A (zh) * | 2020-12-07 | 2021-04-09 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | 摄像头模组和电子装置 |
CN112804456A (zh) * | 2021-01-08 | 2021-05-14 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 摄像模组及电子设备 |
CN113452879A (zh) * | 2021-06-02 | 2021-09-28 | 江西晶浩光学有限公司 | 摄像头模组及电子设备 |
CN113507553A (zh) * | 2021-07-21 | 2021-10-15 | Tcl通讯(宁波)有限公司 | 摄像头模组及其移动终端 |
CN115061264A (zh) * | 2022-06-29 | 2022-09-16 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 摄像模组和电子设备 |
CN116055832A (zh) * | 2021-10-28 | 2023-05-02 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 摄像头模组及电子设备 |
Families Citing this family (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN114578535B (zh) * | 2020-11-30 | 2023-06-20 | 深圳市瑞图生物技术有限公司 | 光路转换装置及光学系统 |
CN112492175B (zh) * | 2020-12-08 | 2022-06-10 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 摄像模组 |
CN112511731A (zh) * | 2020-12-17 | 2021-03-16 | 南昌欧菲光电技术有限公司 | 摄像模组及电子设备 |
CN112822361B (zh) * | 2020-12-30 | 2022-11-18 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 电子设备 |
CN113766219A (zh) * | 2021-09-15 | 2021-12-07 | 昆山丘钛光电科技有限公司 | 一种摄像模组工装及测试装置 |
WO2023103376A1 (zh) * | 2021-12-08 | 2023-06-15 | 杭州海康威视数字技术股份有限公司 | 摄像机 |
CN115150534B (zh) * | 2022-06-27 | 2024-08-02 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | 设备本体及电子设备 |
CN117676294A (zh) * | 2022-08-09 | 2024-03-08 | 晋城三赢精密电子有限公司 | 摄像头模组及电子产品 |
SE546247C2 (en) * | 2022-11-17 | 2024-09-10 | Topgolf Sweden Ab | Method and arrangement for adjusting a camera lens in relation to a camera sensor |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH10254055A (ja) * | 1997-03-10 | 1998-09-25 | Minolta Co Ltd | 多焦点カメラ |
US5986254A (en) * | 1997-08-11 | 1999-11-16 | Mustek Systems, Inc. | Multi-lenses optical device |
CN2757153Y (zh) * | 2004-07-16 | 2006-02-08 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | 数码相机模组 |
US20100066894A1 (en) * | 2006-10-17 | 2010-03-18 | Samsung Digital Imaging Co., Ltd. | Imaging device having a dual lens optical system |
CN107515459A (zh) * | 2016-06-17 | 2017-12-26 | 宁波舜宇光电信息有限公司 | 潜望式摄像模组及其成像方法 |
Family Cites Families (22)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH10262167A (ja) * | 1997-03-19 | 1998-09-29 | Minolta Co Ltd | スチルビデオカメラ |
JP2004260787A (ja) * | 2002-09-09 | 2004-09-16 | Rohm Co Ltd | イメージセンサモジュール |
CN1655592A (zh) * | 2004-02-15 | 2005-08-17 | 林永全 | 采用多个感光器件的摄像装置 |
CN1837880B (zh) | 2005-03-25 | 2010-04-28 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | 镜头模组 |
JP4822512B2 (ja) * | 2006-02-13 | 2011-11-24 | パナソニック株式会社 | ズームレンズ系、レンズ鏡筒、撮像装置及びカメラ |
US20080266443A1 (en) | 2007-04-30 | 2008-10-30 | Jung Yul Lee | Camera Module |
CN201491117U (zh) * | 2009-06-05 | 2010-05-26 | 东莞市南星电子有限公司 | 一种具有夜视功能的自动感应拍照数码照相机 |
US20110063446A1 (en) * | 2009-09-14 | 2011-03-17 | Mcmordie David | Saccadic dual-resolution video analytics camera |
DE102010017057B4 (de) | 2010-05-21 | 2015-03-19 | Jena-Optronik Gmbh | Kamera mit mehreren Festbrennweiten |
JP2012068510A (ja) * | 2010-09-24 | 2012-04-05 | Hoya Corp | 撮影光学系、及び撮影装置 |
US8213783B2 (en) * | 2010-11-18 | 2012-07-03 | Tdk Taiwan Corp. | Anti-shake device and optical system having the same |
US20140193144A1 (en) * | 2011-04-07 | 2014-07-10 | Leonard Coster | Method and apparatus for multiple camera alignment and use |
CN104980541A (zh) * | 2015-07-13 | 2015-10-14 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | 一种摄像模组和移动终端 |
DE102015215845B4 (de) | 2015-08-19 | 2017-06-22 | Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der angewandten Forschung e.V. | Multiaperturabbildungsvorrichtung mit kanalindividueller Einstellbarkeit |
US10516773B2 (en) * | 2016-10-13 | 2019-12-24 | Samsung Electro-Mechanics Co., Ltd. | Camera module and portable electronic device including the same |
US10121236B2 (en) * | 2016-10-26 | 2018-11-06 | Himax Technologies Limited | Automatic alignment apparatus and associated method |
CN107404604B (zh) * | 2017-01-16 | 2019-01-18 | 南昌欧菲光电技术有限公司 | 组装方法及相机模组 |
CN206960757U (zh) * | 2017-03-31 | 2018-02-02 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | 摄像头模组及终端 |
CN107465859A (zh) * | 2017-09-19 | 2017-12-12 | 信利光电股份有限公司 | 一种摄像模组及电子设备 |
CN208581282U (zh) * | 2018-05-16 | 2019-03-05 | 宁波舜宇光电信息有限公司 | 光转向组件、潜望式摄像模组、阵列模组以及电子设备 |
EP3955562B1 (en) * | 2019-05-05 | 2024-06-12 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Camera module, terminal device, imaging method and imaging apparatus |
TWI730637B (zh) * | 2020-02-24 | 2021-06-11 | 大陽科技股份有限公司 | 相機模組與電子裝置 |
-
2019
- 2019-08-12 CN CN201910738974.2A patent/CN111917946B/zh active Active
- 2019-08-12 CN CN202111353943.9A patent/CN114222037B/zh active Active
-
2020
- 2020-05-09 EP EP20805425.4A patent/EP3920522A4/en not_active Ceased
- 2020-05-09 US US17/604,888 patent/US12069357B2/en active Active
- 2020-05-09 DE DE202020006055.0U patent/DE202020006055U1/de active Active
- 2020-05-09 WO PCT/CN2020/089477 patent/WO2020228648A1/zh unknown
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH10254055A (ja) * | 1997-03-10 | 1998-09-25 | Minolta Co Ltd | 多焦点カメラ |
US5986254A (en) * | 1997-08-11 | 1999-11-16 | Mustek Systems, Inc. | Multi-lenses optical device |
CN2757153Y (zh) * | 2004-07-16 | 2006-02-08 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | 数码相机模组 |
US20100066894A1 (en) * | 2006-10-17 | 2010-03-18 | Samsung Digital Imaging Co., Ltd. | Imaging device having a dual lens optical system |
CN107515459A (zh) * | 2016-06-17 | 2017-12-26 | 宁波舜宇光电信息有限公司 | 潜望式摄像模组及其成像方法 |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
Title |
---|
See also references of EP3920522A4 |
Cited By (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN112637452A (zh) * | 2020-12-07 | 2021-04-09 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | 摄像头模组和电子装置 |
CN112804456A (zh) * | 2021-01-08 | 2021-05-14 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 摄像模组及电子设备 |
CN112804456B (zh) * | 2021-01-08 | 2022-06-10 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 摄像模组及电子设备 |
CN113452879A (zh) * | 2021-06-02 | 2021-09-28 | 江西晶浩光学有限公司 | 摄像头模组及电子设备 |
CN113507553A (zh) * | 2021-07-21 | 2021-10-15 | Tcl通讯(宁波)有限公司 | 摄像头模组及其移动终端 |
CN116055832A (zh) * | 2021-10-28 | 2023-05-02 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 摄像头模组及电子设备 |
CN115061264A (zh) * | 2022-06-29 | 2022-09-16 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 摄像模组和电子设备 |
CN115061264B (zh) * | 2022-06-29 | 2024-07-19 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 摄像模组和电子设备 |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN114222037B (zh) | 2024-04-02 |
US12069357B2 (en) | 2024-08-20 |
EP3920522A4 (en) | 2022-06-15 |
CN111917946B (zh) | 2021-11-19 |
DE202020006055U1 (de) | 2024-07-10 |
CN114222037A (zh) | 2022-03-22 |
EP3920522A1 (en) | 2021-12-08 |
CN111917946A (zh) | 2020-11-10 |
US20220217253A1 (en) | 2022-07-07 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2020228648A1 (zh) | 摄像模组及电子设备 | |
WO2021104013A1 (zh) | 摄像头模组及电子设备 | |
WO2021104017A1 (zh) | 摄像头模组及电子设备 | |
KR100900486B1 (ko) | 촬상 장치용 광학 모듈 및 이를 구비한 촬상 장치 | |
CN109639997B (zh) | 图像处理方法、电子装置及介质 | |
CN110266851B (zh) | 摄像头模组、电子设备及摄像头模组的控制方法 | |
CN213690191U (zh) | 光路转换模块及包括其的相机模块和便携式终端 | |
WO2023011559A1 (zh) | 摄像模组以及电子设备 | |
US20070127139A1 (en) | Lens barrel, image pick-up apparatus and lens position adjustment method | |
CN115993751A (zh) | 相机模块与电子装置 | |
TW202248688A (zh) | 成像裝置、相機模組與電子裝置 | |
CN112511731A (zh) | 摄像模组及电子设备 | |
CN111988454A (zh) | 摄像头模组及电子设备 | |
CN117555191A (zh) | 遮光结构与成像镜头模块 | |
CN113784027B (zh) | 一种潜望式摄像头组件及电子设备 | |
JP2011158793A (ja) | 撮像装置 | |
EP3896516B1 (en) | Camera and terminal device | |
US7764874B2 (en) | Image-taking apparatus | |
CN113315899A (zh) | 摄像头组件、电子设备及其控制方法 | |
WO2021184245A1 (zh) | 摄像头模组及电子设备 | |
JP2013047731A (ja) | レンズ鏡筒、及び撮像装置 | |
WO2020019838A1 (zh) | 成像模组、摄像头组件和电子装置 | |
CN114859538B (zh) | 塑胶光转折元件、成像镜头模块及电子装置 | |
KR102345118B1 (ko) | 카메라 모듈 및 이를 포함하는 휴대 단말기 | |
CN114079710A (zh) | 潜望式连续光变摄像模组及相应的电子设备 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 20805425 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2020805425 Country of ref document: EP Effective date: 20210903 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |